WO2016149111A1 - Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors - Google Patents

Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016149111A1
WO2016149111A1 PCT/US2016/022082 US2016022082W WO2016149111A1 WO 2016149111 A1 WO2016149111 A1 WO 2016149111A1 US 2016022082 W US2016022082 W US 2016022082W WO 2016149111 A1 WO2016149111 A1 WO 2016149111A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
methyl
phenyl
alkyl
fex
acrylate
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2016/022082
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Sungsoon FANG
Eiji YOSHIHARA
Ruth T. Yu
Annette Atkins
Michael Downes
Ronald M. Evans
Original Assignee
Salk Institute For Biological Studies
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Salk Institute For Biological Studies filed Critical Salk Institute For Biological Studies
Priority to AU2016233579A priority Critical patent/AU2016233579A1/en
Priority to KR1020177027280A priority patent/KR20170123658A/en
Priority to EP16765500.0A priority patent/EP3267991A4/en
Priority to CA2979399A priority patent/CA2979399A1/en
Priority to JP2017548103A priority patent/JP2018510866A/en
Publication of WO2016149111A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016149111A1/en
Priority to US15/697,271 priority patent/US20180000768A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/21Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates
    • A61K31/215Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates of carboxylic acids
    • A61K31/216Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates of carboxylic acids of acids having aromatic rings, e.g. benactizyne, clofibrate
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/192Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having aromatic groups, e.g. sulindac, 2-aryl-propionic acids, ethacrynic acid 
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/4151,2-Diazoles
    • A61K31/4161,2-Diazoles condensed with carbocyclic ring systems, e.g. indazole
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/42Oxazoles
    • A61K31/4211,3-Oxazoles, e.g. pemoline, trimethadione
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/42Oxazoles
    • A61K31/422Oxazoles not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/425Thiazoles
    • A61K31/427Thiazoles not condensed and containing further heterocyclic rings
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/439Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom the ring forming part of a bridged ring system, e.g. quinuclidine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A61K31/53751,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine
    • A61K31/5381,4-Oxazines, e.g. morpholine ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic ring systems
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2300/00Mixtures or combinations of active ingredients, wherein at least one active ingredient is fully defined in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00

Definitions

  • This disclosure concerns methods for using farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists to treat or prevent latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LAD A).
  • FXR farnesoid X receptor
  • Type II diabetes is characterized by progressive failure of pancreatic ⁇ cell function and the glucagon-like peptide- 1 (GLP1) signaling targeted drugs such as GLP1 analogues and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 (DPP-4) inhibitors are widely used for treatment of T2D.
  • GLP1 glucagon-like peptide- 1
  • DPP-4 dipeptidyl peptidase-4
  • lipids especially saturated fatty acids, accumulate in ⁇ cells to induce ⁇ cell dysfunction and lipotoxic apoptosis.
  • GLPs and glucagon are hormones encoded by the same gene, pro glucagon, each having different physiological activities. Due to alternative processing by prohormone convertases, glucagon is predominantly produced in endocrine pancreatic a cells whereas GLPs are predominantly produced in the intestine.
  • GLP-1 is primarily produced in L cells during the postprandial state to promote insulin secretion in pancreatic ⁇ cells to reduce blood glucose levels.
  • Administration of a GLP-1 antagonist leads to increased blood glucose levels in humans, whereas disruption of the GLP-1 receptor gene results in glucose intolerance in a rodent model.
  • Treatment of diabetic patients with GLP-1 or GLP-1 analogues increases meal- stimulated insulin secretion and suppresses postprandial
  • Fexaramine is a non-systemic FXR agonist that mimics food activation of intestinal FXR, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation.
  • Fex or FXR agonist treatment produces a novel means to treat or prevent LADA.
  • Fex also increases expression of GLP-1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic ⁇ cells to enhance glucose-stimulated insulin secretion.
  • GLP-1R GLP-1 receptor
  • Fex-D a structurally modified Fex analog, Fex-D remarkably improved metabolic parameters with relatively low dosage.
  • the beneficial efficacy achieved with Fex and its analog, Fex-D indicates that intestinal FXR activation is a safer approach in the treatment or prevention of latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA).
  • intestinal FXR activation is used in the treatment or prevention of latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA).
  • intestinal FXR activation is accomplished by administering at least one FXR agonist to the adult with LADA.
  • the FXR agonist is a FXR agonist as described herein.
  • the FXR agonist is administered to an adult with LADA at a dose that results in a systemic level of the FXR agonist below the EC 50 for the FXR agonist (e.g., such that there is minimal activation outside the intestines).
  • the FXR agonist is administered to an adult with LADA at a dose that results in less than 30 nM of the FXR agonist in the serum 1 hour following the administration.
  • LADA noninsulin-dependent diabetes mellitus symptoms
  • IDDM insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
  • IPDDM immunological and clinical features of insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus
  • changes in lifestyle e.g., maintaining a healthy weight, exercising, eating sensibly
  • the diagnosis of LADA can be based on a high blood sugar in combination with the clinical impression that islet failure rather than insulin resistance is the main cause.
  • such patients may have a low C-peptide levels and antibodies against the islets of Langerhans, islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma- associated (IA-2) autoantibodies, and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8).
  • ICA islet cell antibodies
  • GAD A glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies
  • IA-2 insulinoma- associated autoantibodies
  • ZnT8 zinc transporter autoantibodies
  • a subject such as a mammal.
  • such subjects have a fasting blood glucose level of 126 mg/dl or more (e.g., are hyperglycemic), are not overweight (e.g., normal weight or have a body mass index of 18.5 to 25 or 16 to 18.5) or are overweight or are obese (e.g., have a body mass index of at least 25, at least 30, at least 35 or at least 40, such as 29-29, 30-34, or 35-40, or greater than 40), are insulin-resistant or produce no insulin, have persistent islet cell antibodies, have high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity, have DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes, show progressive loss of beta cells, adult disease onset, defective glycaemic control, without tendency to ketoacidosis, have low levels of C-peptide, or combinations thereof.
  • such methods include administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of one or more farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists (such as, but not limited to, deuterated Fex or a Fex analog) (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 of such compounds).
  • FXR farnesoid X receptor
  • Fex and its analogs are substantially absorbed in the gastrointestinal tract, thereby activating FXR receptors in the intestines to treat or prevent LADA in the subject.
  • absorption of the compounds is substantially limited to the intestines.
  • the FXR agonist substantially enhances FXR target gene expression in the intestines while not substantially enhancing FXR target gene expression in the liver or kidney.
  • administering one or more FXR agonists results in no substantial change in food intake and/or fat consumption in the subject, and/or no substantial change in appetite in the subject.
  • administering one or more FXR agonists can also restore pancreatic beta cell function, increase glucose stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) without significantly changing body weight, increase GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells, increase expression of GLP-1R in pancreatic beta cells, or combinations thereof, for example as compared to no administration of one or more FXR agonists.
  • GSIS glucose stimulated insulin secretion
  • the methods improve glucose homeostasis in the subject.
  • the method further includes administering to the subject an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, an amylin agonist, a dipeptidyl-peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitor, a glucagon-like peptide (GLP) agonist, meglitinide, sulfonylurea, a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist, or combinations thereof.
  • exemplary Farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonist compounds, and compositions comprising such compounds, that target intestinal FXR that can be used in the disclosed method embodiments are provided. Certain exemplary compounds have the following general formula
  • R b is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide)
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro
  • R fa and R ft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl
  • L a and L b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi- bond
  • L c and L d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl
  • R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S;
  • R x3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl;
  • L x is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ;
  • R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ;
  • R x6 and R x7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl;
  • R x2 is selected from -C(0)L x2 R x8 or a carboxyl bioisostere
  • I/ 2 is a bond or NR x3 ;
  • R x8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -OR x9 , N(R x9 ) 2 , -C(0)R x9 , - S(0) 2 R x9 , -C(0)OR x9 , -S(0) 2 N(R x9 ) 2 or -C(0)N(R x9 ) 2 ; and
  • each R x9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl;
  • R a is cyclohexyl
  • R ft is H and X is then R is not methyl, ethyl or tert-butyl
  • R b is methyl, R fc is H and X is then R a is not cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl;
  • R a is cyclohexyl
  • R ft is H and X is then R b is not methyl or tert-butyl
  • R a is cyclohexyl
  • R b is methyl
  • R fc is H
  • the compounds L c and L d are both H, and L a and L b together form a pi-bond.
  • R 1 is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or polycyclic;
  • R 2 is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl;
  • Y is selected from N, N-0 or C-R 3d ;
  • R 3a , R 3b , R 3c and R 3d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro;
  • R 4a and R 4b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl;
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; and
  • L 1 and L 2 are both hydrogen or together form a pi-bond
  • Y is N or C-halogen
  • R 1 is polycyclic
  • R 4 is D
  • R 5a is F, CI or I
  • R 5d and R 5e together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring
  • R 5b and R 5c together form an aryl, cycloalkyl, nitrogen- containing heterocyclic or nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring; or any combination thereof.
  • Y is C-R 3d , and R 3d or R 5a or both are halogen, and in certain examples the halogen is fluorine. In other embodiments, Y is N.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], 3.3.2], [3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], 3.3.2], [3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], 3.3.2], [3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.
  • R 5c is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring, and the compound has a formula
  • Z is selected from N, CH, or C-alkyl
  • R 6a , R 6c , R 6d and R 6g each is independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl
  • R 6h is selected from H, D, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl.
  • Z is N, and/or R 6a , R 6c , R 6d and R 6g are all H.
  • R 6h is methyl.
  • R 5c comprises phenyl, leading to compounds having a formula
  • R , R , R 6c and R 6 each is independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl; G is a lone pair of electrons, or an oxygen; R 6e and R 6f each is independently selected from alkyl, H or cycloalkyl; and
  • R 3d or R 5a or both are halogen, or R 4 is D, or R 1 is polycyclic, or any combination thereof.
  • R 6e and R 6f are both methyl.
  • R 4 may be deuterium, and/or R 2 may be methyl.
  • R 1 is cyclohexyl.
  • the compound is selected from:
  • R ! -R 15 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R 16 is selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R a and R b are independently hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic or D-aliphatic, or together form a bond, such as a pi-bond; and if R a and R b together form a pi-bond then at least one of R ! -R 16 is or comprises deuterium.
  • disclosed compounds have a formula
  • disclosed compounds have a formula
  • R ! -R 16 is or comprises deuterium.
  • R 7 is alkyl or deuterated alkyl, such as isopropyl or a deuterated isopropyl group comprising from 1 to 7 deuterium atoms.
  • at least one of R ! -R 5 is a halogen, such as fluoro.
  • R 16 is hydrogen.
  • R 10 and R 11 independently are alkyl or deuterated alkyl, such as methyl or deuterated methyl, wherein the deuterated alkyl group comprises from 1 to n halogen
  • R 21 -R 34 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CX 3 , where X is a halogen, such as fluorine, with CF 3 being a particular example, N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R 35 is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D- heteroaliphatic; R 36 is hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; X is N or CR 37 ; and R 37 is hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester,
  • disclosed compounds have a formula
  • R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, deuterated alkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl, such as cyclohexyl or deuterated cyclohexyl comprising 1 to 11 deuterium atoms.
  • R 36 is hydrogen;
  • R 34 is CF 3 ;
  • R 23 is halogen, such as fluorine or chlorine.
  • Certain compounds are chiral, and all stereoisomers are included in this disclosure.
  • the compound is the most biologically active stereoisomer, such as the /S-stereoisomer.
  • Exemplary compounds according to this formula include
  • R -R 8 and R 52 -R 55 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R 49 -R 51 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R 56 is amino, cycloamino or substituted cycloamino;
  • Y and Z are independently N or CR 57 ; and each R 57 independently is selected from deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, hetero
  • disclosed compounds have a formula selected from
  • R 51 is aliphatic or D-aliphatic, such as methyl or deuterated methyl having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
  • R 49 and R 50 independently are hydrogen or deuterium; and R 41 and R 45 independently are aliphatic or D-aliphatic, such as methyl or deuterated methyl having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
  • R 56 is a cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as pyrrolidine, 2-methylpyrrolidine, morpholine, -methylpiperazine, piperidine, or azepane. Exemplary compounds having this formula include
  • R ! -R 57 is -R x -L x -R x2 , where R x is selected from O, NR , sulfonyl or S; R is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ; R x6 and R are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; R x2 is selected from -C(0)L x2 R x8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L x2 is a bond or NR x3 ; R x8 is H, aliphatic, -OR x9 , N
  • compositions comprising the disclosed compounds also are provided.
  • the composition comprises a first disclosed compound, and an additional component, such as a pharmaceutically exceptable excipient, an additional therapeutic compound, or a combination thereof.
  • the additional therapeutic compound is a second disclosed compound.
  • the composition has an enteric coating.
  • FIGS. 1A-1D show that fexaramine (Fex) enhances thermogenesis in leptin-deficient ob/ob mice.
  • Fex fexaramine
  • FIGS. 2A-2I show that Fex improves glucose homeostasis without body weight changes in leptin-deficient mice.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • A Body weight curve
  • B Body weight composition by MRI
  • C Wet weight of inguinal (iWAT), gonadal (gWAT) white adipose tissue and liver
  • D Serum glucose levels after 4 hour fast
  • E Insulin levels after 4 hour fast
  • F Glucose tolerance test
  • G Insulin tolerance test
  • ITT Insulin tolerance test
  • PTT Pyruvate tolerance test
  • FIGS. 3A-3C show that Fex increases the M2-macrophage population to suppress inflammation in adipose tissues.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • A Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in cytokine signaling in gWAT are largely reduced by Fex treatment
  • B Pathway analyses of gene expression changes in gWAT
  • C Macrophage profile in gWAT. Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIGS. 4A-4D show that Fex enhances insulin signaling in skeletal muscles.
  • Leptin- deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • A Pathway analyses of gene expression changes in skeletal muscles, including quadriceps and soleus
  • B Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in mitochrodial function and insulin signaling in quadriceps are largely increased upon Fex treatment
  • C Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in mitochrodial function and oxidation/reduction reactions in soleus are largely increased upon Fex treatment
  • D qPCR of gene expression in quadriceps and soleus. Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the
  • FIGS. 5A-5C show that Fex reduces gluconeogenesis/lipogenesis in the liver.
  • Leptin- deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • FIGS. 6A-6D show that Fex enhances glucose metabolism in leptin-deficient mice.
  • FIGS. 7A-7G show that Fex enhances mitochondrial activity to increase glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) secretion in enteroendocnne L cells.
  • A-B Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks
  • A Gene expression profile in ileum
  • B Heatmap depicting that the expression of selected gene involved in mitochrondrial metabolism are increased upon Fex treatment
  • C-E Human intestinal L cells (NCI-H716) were treated with vehicle or Fex (1 ⁇ ) for 24 hr.
  • C Real-time oxygen consumption rate in vitro
  • D ATP maintenance in vehicle or Fexa- treated L cells.
  • ATP levels were measured upon treatment with Bethanechol chloride (uncoupler)
  • E Glucose stimulated GLP-1 secretion from L cells after treatment with control (DMSO), Fex, or the TGR5 ligand INT-777, normalized to 0 mM glucose
  • F-G Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or fexaramine (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • F Serum total GLP-1 levels
  • G Glucose tolerance test performed after pre-treatment with the Dpp4 inhibitor, Sitagliptin (lOmg/kg). Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIG. 8 shows that functional FXR is expressed in enteroendocrinal L cells.
  • QPCR shows that the FXR target gene SHP is induced by Fex and Fex-D treatment, but not by the TGR5 ligand INT-777. Proglucagon expression is selectively induced by INT-777, while the expression of DPP4 is not affected by either FXR or TGR5 ligands.
  • FIGS. 9A-9B show that FEX enhances mitochondrial activity to maintain ATP levels in enteroendocrine L cells. Human intestinal L cells were treated with vehicle (DMSO), fexaramine (1 ⁇ ) or the FRX antagonist gugglusterone ( ⁇ ) for 24 hr.
  • OCR Oxygen consumption rate
  • B Total GLP-1 secretion at basal condition.
  • FIGS. 10A-10F show that Fex restores glucose-stimulated insulin secretion in pancreatic ⁇ cells.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • Fex Insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge.
  • FIG. 1 Insulin content in islets
  • C ex vivo glucose-stimulated insulin secretion from isolated pancreatic islets
  • D Histological analysis
  • E Heatmaps depicting that Fex treatment largely reduces the expression of genes involved in apoptosis, and increases the expression of genes involved in wound healing, cAMP signaling, insulin secretion, and Redox reactions in islets
  • F Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with Fexaramine (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks followed by treatment with vehicle or the GLP-1 antagonist Ex-9 (100 g/kg) via LP for two weeks. Insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge. Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIG. 11 shows that FEX restores pancreatic beta cell physiology via GLP-1 signaling.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with Fex (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 6 weeks.
  • FIGS. 12A-12H show that structurally modified Fex analogues increase glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) secretion to restore glucose stimulated insulin secretion in leptin-deficient mice.
  • GLP-1 glucagon-like peptide 1
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex, or the analogue Fex-D (50 mg/kg) via P.O. for 14 days
  • A Chemical structures of fexaramine and Fex-D
  • B Chemical structures of fexaramine and Fex-D
  • C Serum glucose levels
  • D Glucose tolerance test
  • E Insulin secretion in vivo
  • F GLP-1 secretion in vivo
  • G Heatmap showing hierarchal clustering of gene expression changes in islet induced by Fex (100 mg/kg, 4wks) and FexD (50 mg/kg, 2 weeks) treatment in ob/ob mice (in vivo); by treatment of islets with XL335 (1 ⁇ ), Fex (1 ⁇ ), mFgfl5 and hFgfl9 (24 hours ex vivo); and mFgfl5 (0.15 mg/kg, 2 weeks) and INT777 (Tgr5, 60 mg/kg, 4 weeks) treatment of ob/ob mice (in vivo).
  • RNA- Seq was measured by RNA- Seq and changes are expressed as Z-score.
  • H Ven diagram of changes in gene expression in pancreatic islets induced by FEX (lOOmg/kg for 5 weeks) and FEX-D (50mg/kg for 14 days). Pathway analysis of genes co-regulated by Fex and Fex-D. Heatmap comparing gene expression changes induced by Fex and Fex-D, revealing increased efficacy of Fex-D as well as altered specificity. Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIGS. 13A-13D show that FEX-D enhances thermogenesis and oxygen consumption.
  • A-B Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex, or Fex analogue Fex-D (50 mg/kg) via P.O. for 14 days.
  • A Body weight curves and
  • B Core body temperature.
  • C Oxygen consumption rate (OCR) of human intestinal L cells treated with vehicle (DMSO), Fex (1 ⁇ ), FEX-D (1 ⁇ ) or XL335 (1 ⁇ ) for 24 hr.
  • D Gene expression changes, as measured by QPCR, in the livers of ob/ob mice treated with vehicle or Fex-D, indicating that oral Fex-D delivery does not activate FXR target genes in liver. Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIGS. 14A-14G show that Fex rescues ⁇ cells through enhanced redox and reduced apoptosis similar to TGR5 activation.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex (lOOmg/kg), or the TGR5 agonist, INT-777 (60mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • B MRI Body composition
  • C Blood glucose levels
  • D Glucose tolerance test
  • GTT Insulin tolerance test
  • ITT In vivo glucose stimulated insulin secretion
  • Data represent the mean ⁇ STD.
  • FIGS. 15A-15C show that Fex rescues ⁇ cells through enhanced redox and reduced apoptosis similar to TGR5 activation.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex (100 mg/kg), or the TGR5 agonist, INT-777 (60 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks.
  • A Ven diagrams showing overlap in gene expression changes induced in islet by Fex and INT-777 treatments
  • B Pathway analyses of commonly regulated genes in islets
  • C Heatmap of transcriptional changes in islets indicating that Fex and INT-777 treatments induce similar changes in genes involved in different physiological processes.
  • FIGS. 16A-16D show the effects of the FGF15 signaling pathway on glucose homeostasis. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or FGF-15
  • Insulin tolerance test (D) Glucose uptake into skeletal muscle (soleus). Data represent the mean ⁇ STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p ⁇ 0.05, **p ⁇ 0.01.
  • FIGS. 17A-17F show the transcriptional changes induced in pancreatic islets.
  • Ob/ob mice were treated with Fex (100 mg/kg for 5 weeks), INT-777 (60 mg/kg for 5 weeks), or FGF- 15 (0.15 mg/kg for 2 weeks).
  • Fex 100 mg/kg for 5 weeks
  • INT-777 60 mg/kg for 5 weeks
  • FGF- 15 0.15 mg/kg for 2 weeks.
  • A Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in sterol/cholesterol metabolic processes, showing similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment largely suppressed these genes.
  • B Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in oxidation/reduction, showing similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment largely suppressed these genes.
  • FIG. 18 is a heatmap of expression changes of selected genes in pancreatic islets from ob/ob mice treated with fexaramine analogs, Fex, Fex-D, and Salkl lO, revealing similar expression changes with the three analogs.
  • amino acid sequences are shown using standard three letter code for amino acids, as defined in 37 C.F.R. 1.822.
  • SEQ ID NO. 1 is a protein sequence of GLP-l-(7-36).
  • SEQ ID NO. 2 is a protein sequence of GLP-2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • substituted group means that one or more hydrogen atoms of the specified group or radical is each, independently of one another, replaced with the same or different non-hydrogen substituent.
  • substituent groups are identified below.
  • Each M + may independently be, for example, an alkali ion, such as K + , Na + , Li + ; an ammonium ion, such as + N(R 60 )4; or an alkaline earth ion, such as [Ca 2+ ]o. 5 , [Mg 2+ ]o. 5 , or [Ba 2+ ]o. 5 ("subscript 0.5" means e.g.
  • one of the counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions can be an ionized form of a compound of the invention and the other a typical counter ion such as chloride, or two ionized compounds of the invention can serve as counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions, or a doubly ionized compound of the invention can serve as the counter ion for such divalent alkali earth ions).
  • - R 80 R 80 is meant to include - H 2 , - H-alkyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, N- piperazinyl, V-methyl-piperazin-l-yl, 7V-morpholinyl and -N(alkyl) 2 such as, for example, -N(methyl) 2 or -N(methyl)(ethyl).
  • Substituent groups for hydrogens on unsaturated carbon atoms in "substituted" alkene, cycloalkene, alkyne, aryl and heteroaryl groups are, unless otherwise specified, -R 60 , halo, deuterium, -O M + , -OR 70 , -SR 70 , -S " M + , - R 80 R 80 , trihalomethyl, -CF 3 , -CN, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -N0 2 , -N 3 , -S0 2 R 70 , -S0 3 " M + , -S0 3 R 70 , -OS0 2 R 70 , -OS0 3 M + , -OS0 3 R 70 , -P0 3 " 2(M + ) 2 , -P(O)(OR 70 )O-M + , -P(O)(OR 70 ) 2 , -C(0)R 70
  • Substituent groups for replacing hydrogens on nitrogen atoms in "substituted" heterocyclic groups are, unless otherwise specified, -R 60 , -0 " M + , -OR 70 , -SR 70 , -S " M + ,
  • -NR 80 R 80 trihalomethyl, -CF 3 , -CN, -NO, -N0 2 , -S(0) 2 R 70 , -S(0) 2 0 " M + , -S(0) 2 OR 70 , -OS(0) 2 R 70 , -OS(0) 2 O M + , 0S(0) 2 0R 70 , - ⁇ (0)(0 " ) 2 ( ⁇ + ) 2 , -P(O)(OR 70 )O " M + ,
  • a group that is substituted has 1 substituent, 1 or 2
  • impermissible substitution patterns are understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art.
  • Acyl means, unless otherwise stated, -C(0)R where R is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
  • Aliphatic refers to a substantially hydrocarbon-based compound, or a radical thereof (e.g., C 6 H 13 , for a hexane radical), including alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, including cyclic versions thereof, such as alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and cycloalkynyl, and further including straight- and branched-chain arrangements, and all stereo and position isomers as well.
  • an aliphatic group contains from one to at least twenty- five carbon atoms; for example, from one to fifteen, from one to ten, from one to six, or from one to four carbon atoms.
  • lower aliphatic refers to an aliphatic group comprising from one to ten carbon atoms.
  • An aliphatic chain may be substituted or unsubstituted. Unless expressly referred to as an "unsubstituted aliphatic," an aliphatic group can either be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • Exemplary aliphatic substituents include, for instance, amino, amide, sulfonamide, halo, cyano, carboxy, hydroxyl, mercapto, trifluoromethyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, thioalkoxy, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, or other functionality.
  • D-aliphatic refers to an aliphatic group where at least one hydrogen has been substituted by deuterium.
  • Alkyl refers to a hydrocarbon group having a saturated carbon chain, which, unless otherwise specified, may optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described in the definition of "substituted.”
  • the chain may be cyclic, branched or unbranched.
  • lower alkyl means that the alkyl chain includes 1-10 carbon atoms e.g.
  • a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl and an isopropyl group are all represented by the term C 1-3 alkyl.
  • alkenyl and alkynyl refer to hydrocarbon groups having carbon chains containing one or more double or triple bonds, respectively.
  • Alkylene refers to divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, that are either straight-chained or branched, which may optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein, unless otherwise specified. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), n-propylene (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -), iso-propylene (-CH 2 CH(CH 3 )-) or (-CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -), and the like.
  • Alkynylene refers to divalent unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, that are either straight- chained or branched and include at least one triple bond. Unless otherwise specified, the group may be optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynylene (-C ⁇ C-) and n-propynylene (-C ⁇ CCH 2 -) and the like.
  • Alkylthio refers to the group -S -alkyl.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group -O-alkyl. Alkoxy includes, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, t-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, and the like.
  • Acyl refers to the groups H-C(O)- alkyl-C(O)- alkenyl-C(O)- alkynyl-C(O)- cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)-, or heterocyclic-C(O)-.
  • acyl includes the "acetyl” group CH 3 C(0)-.
  • Amino refers to the group - R'R", wherein R' and R" independently are selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic, or where R' and R" are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a cycloamino group such as a heterocyclic, deuterated heterocyclic, heteroaryl or deuterated heteroaryl group comprising at least one ring nitrogen.
  • Exemplary cycloamino groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidine, pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, piperidine, triazinane, piperazine, morpholine, azepane, diazepane, azocane, diazocane, azonane or azecane.
  • Aminosulfonyl refers to a chemical function group -S0 2 -amino.
  • a primary aminosulfonyl is -S0 2 NH 2 .
  • Certain embodiments refer to the group -S0 2 NR R where R and R are independently are selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic, or where R and R are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a heterocyclic group.
  • Aryl or “Ar” refers to an aromatic moiety, such as a carbocyclic group of from 6 to 15 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl) in which at least one of the condensed rings is aromatic (e.g., 2-benzoxazolinone, 2H- l,4-benzoxazin-3(4H)-one-7-yl, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene, and the like), provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of the aromatic aryl group.
  • the aryl group may be optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein.
  • Preferred aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • alkenyl refers to straight chain or branched hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms and preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms and having at least 1 double bond. Unless otherwise specified, the alkenyl group may be optionally substituted. Such groups are exemplified, for example, bi-vinyl, allyl, and but-3-en-l-yl. Included within this term are the cis and trans isomers or mixtures of these isomers, unless otherwise specified.
  • Alkynyl refers to straight chain or branched hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and having at least 1 site of triple bond unsaturation. Unless otherwise specified, the alkynyl group may be optionally substituted. Such groups are exemplified, for example, by ethynyl, 1-propynyl and 2-propynyl.
  • Boronic acid refers to the groups -B(OR) 2 , where each R independently is selected from H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or where the R substituents form a ring, such as in a picolinate
  • Carboxyl refers to the chemical functional group
  • Carboxyl ester refers to the chemical functional group -C0 2 R where R is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a cyclic alkyl group of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having a single ring, which, unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted.
  • suitable cycloalkyl groups include, for instance, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl and the like.
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to a cyclic alkenyl group of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having a single ring, which, unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted.
  • suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, and
  • Halo refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo and is preferably fluoro or chloro.
  • Heteroaliphatic refers to an aliphatic compound or group having at least one heteroatom, i.e., one or more carbon atoms has been replaced with an atom having at least one lone pair of electrons, typically nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, silicon, or sulfur. Heteroaliphatic compounds or groups may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and include “heterocycle”, “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycloaliphatic", or “heterocyclic” groups. Examples of heterocycles include morpholine and piperidine.
  • D-heteroaliphatic refers to a heteroaliphatic group where at least one hydrogen has been substituted by a deuterium.
  • Heteroaryl refers to an aromatic group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and at least one, and more typically 1 to 4, heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur within the ring. Unless otherwise specified, the heteroaryl group may be optionally substituted.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridinyl, imidazolyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl, quinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyrazolyl or benzothienyl), wherein at least one of the condensed rings is aromatic and may or may not contain a heteroatom, provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of an aromatic ring.
  • the nitrogen and/or sulfur ring atom(s) of the heteroaryl group are optionally oxidized to provide N-oxide (N ⁇ 0), sulfinyl, or sulfonyl moieties.
  • Preferred heteroaryls include pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, thiophenyl, benzopyrazolyl and furanyl.
  • Heterocycle refers to a saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused, bridged and spiro ring systems, and having from 3 to 15 ring atoms, including at least one, and more typically 1 to 4, hetero atoms.
  • the hetero atoms are selected from nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen. Unless otherwise specified, the group may be optionally substituted.
  • fused ring systems one or more of the rings can be cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, provided that the point of attachment is through a non-aromatic ring.
  • the nitrogen and/or sulfur atom(s) of the heterocyclic group are optionally oxidized to provide for the N-oxide, -S(O)-, or -SO2- moieties.
  • heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azetidine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, 4,5,
  • Niro refers to the group -N0 2 .
  • Polycyclic refers to a saturated or unsaturated polycyclic ring system having from about 5 to about 25 carbon atoms and having two or more rings (e.g. 2, 3, 4, or 5 rings).
  • the rings can be fused and/or bridged to form the polycyclic ring system, and unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted.
  • the term includes bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], 5,6] or [6,6] ring systems, as well as the following bridged ring systems:
  • polycyclic rings respectively
  • Polycyclic groups can be linked to the remainder of the compound through any synthetically feasible position. If a stereocenter is created then all possible stereocenters are contemplated.
  • these representative bicyclo and fused ring systems can optionally comprise one or more double bonds in the ring system.
  • “Sulfonyl” refers to the group -SO2-, and includes -SC -alkyl, -SC -alkenyl,
  • Sulfonyl includes groups such as methyl-S0 2 - phenyl-S0 2 - and 4- methylphenyl-S0 2 -
  • Carboxyl bioisosteric or “carboxyl bioisostere” refer to a group with similar physical or chemical properties to a carboxyl group that produce broadly similar biological properties, but which may reduce toxicity or modify the activity of the compound, and may alter the metabolism of the compound.
  • Exemplary carboxyl bioisosteres include, but are not limited to,
  • X 7 , Y 7 , and Z 7 are each independently selected from N, CH 2 or CO where X 9 is selected from O, N, S, CH or CH 2 ; .
  • Additional carboxyl bioisosteric groups contemplated by the present disclosure include
  • Particular examples of the presently disclosed compounds include one or more asymmetric centers; thus these compounds can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
  • compounds and compositions may be provided as individual pure enantiomers or as stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic mixtures.
  • the compounds disclosed herein are synthesized in or are purified to be in substantially enantiopure form, such as in a 90% enantiomeric excess, a 95% enantiomeric excess, a 97% enantiomeric excess or even in greater than a 99% enantiomeric excess, such as in enantiopure form.
  • Prodrugs of the disclosed compounds also are contemplated herein.
  • a prodrug is an active or inactive compound that is modified chemically through in vivo physiological action, such as hydrolysis, metabolism and the like, into an active compound following administration of the prodrug to a subject.
  • the term "prodrug” as used throughout this text means the pharmacologically acceptable derivatives such as esters, amides and phosphates, such that the resulting in vivo biotransformation product of the derivative is the active drug as defined in the compounds described herein.
  • Prodrugs preferably have excellent aqueous solubility, increased bioavailability and are readily metabolized into the active inhibitors in vivo.
  • Prodrugs of a compounds described herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either by routine manipulation or in vivo, to the parent compound.
  • the suitability and techniques involved in making and using prodrugs are well known by those skilled in the art.
  • prodrugs involving esters see Svensson and Tunek, Drug Metabolism Reviews 165 (1988) and Bundgaard, Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985).
  • Prodrug also is intended to include any covalently bonded carriers that release an active parent drug of the present invention in vivo when the prodrug is administered to a subject. Since prodrugs often have enhanced properties relative to the active agent pharmaceutical, such as, solubility and bioavailability, the compounds disclosed herein can be delivered in prodrug form. Thus, also contemplated are prodrugs of the presently disclosed compounds, methods of delivering prodrugs and compositions containing such prodrugs. Prodrugs of the disclosed compounds typically are prepared by modifying one or more functional groups present in the compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to yield the parent compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds having a phosphonate and/or amino group functionalized with any group that is cleaved in vivo to yield the corresponding amino and/or phosphonate group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, without limitation, compounds having an acylated amino group, an ascorbate moiety, an ortho ester, an imidate group and/or a phosphonate ester or phosphonate amide group.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound, which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like. If the molecule contains a basic functionality, pharmaceutically acceptable salts include salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as
  • hydrochloride hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate, and the like.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient” refers to a substantially physiologically inert substance that is used as an additive in a pharmaceutical composition. As used herein, an excipient may be incorporated within particles of a pharmaceutical composition, or it may be physically mixed with particles of a pharmaceutical composition. An excipient can be used, for example, as a carrier, flavoring, thickener, diluent, buffer, preservative, or surface active agent and/or to modify properties of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • excipients include, but are not limited, to polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (also known as vitamin E TPGS, or TPGS), dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline (DPPC), trehalose, sodium bicarbonate, glycine, sodium citrate, and lactose.
  • PVP polyvinylpyrrolidone
  • DPPC dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline
  • trehalose sodium bicarbonate
  • glycine sodium citrate
  • lactose lactose
  • Enteric coating refers to a coating such as may be applied to disclosed compounds or compositions comprising the compounds to help protect drugs from disintegration, digestion etc. in the stomach, such as by enzymes or the pH of the stomach. Typically, the coating helps prevent the drug from being digested in the stomach, and allows delivery of the medication to the intestine.
  • administering refers to methods that may be used to enable delivery of agents or compositions to the desired site of biological action. These methods include, but are not limited to oral routes, intraduodenal routes and rectal administration. Administration techniques that are optionally employed with the agents and methods described herein are found in sources e.g., Goodman and Gilman, The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, current ed.; Pergamon; and Remington's,
  • agents and compositions described herein are administered orally.
  • Calorie refers to the amount of energy, e.g. heat, required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 1 °C.
  • the term "calorie” is often used to describe a kilocalorie.
  • a kilocalorie is the amount of energy needed to increase the temperature of 1 kilogram of water by 1 °C.
  • One kilocalorie equals 1000 calories.
  • the kilocalorie is abbreviated as kc, kcal or Cal, whereas the calorie or gram calorie is abbreviated as cal.
  • food intake in the subject is measured in terms of overall calorie consumption.
  • fat intake can be measured in terms of calories from fat.
  • Co-administration are meant to encompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a subject, and are intended to include treatment regimens in which the agents are administered by the same or different route of administration or at the same (e.g., contemporaneously) or different times.
  • the agents described herein will be co-administered with other agents.
  • These terms encompass administration of two or more agents to the subject so that both agents and/or their metabolites are present in the subject at the same time. They include simultaneous administration in separate compositions, administration at different times in separate compositions, and/or administration in a composition in which both agents are present.
  • the agents described herein and the other agent(s) are administered in a single composition. In some embodiments, the agents described herein and the other agent(s) are admixed in the composition.
  • an “effective amount,” “pharmaceutically effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount,” refer to a sufficient amount of at least one agent being administered to achieve a desired result, e.g., to relieve to some extent one or more symptoms of a disease or condition being treated (e.g., LADA). In certain instances, the result is a reduction and/or alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of a disease, or any other desired alteration of a biological system. In certain instances, an “effective amount” for therapeutic uses is the amount of the composition comprising an agent as set forth herein required to provide a clinically significant decrease in a disease. An appropriate "effective" amount in any individual case can be determined using any suitable technique, such as a dose escalation study.
  • Enhancing enteroendocrine peptide secretion refers to a sufficient increase in the level of the enteroendocrine peptide agent to, for example, decrease hunger in a subject, to curb appetite in a subject and/or decrease the food intake of a subject or individual and/or treat any disease or disorder described herein.
  • FXR farnesoid X receptor (also known as nuclear receptor subfamily 1, group H, member 4 (NR1H4)) (e.g., OMEVI: 603826): This protein functions as a receptor for bile acids, and when bound to bile acids, regulates the expression of genes involved in bile acid synthesis and transport. FXR is expressed at high levels in the liver and intestine. Chenodeoxycholic acid and other bile acids are natural ligands for FXR.
  • NR1H4 nuclear receptor subfamily 1, group H, member 4
  • FXR translocates to the cell nucleus, forms a dimer (in this case a heterodimer with RXR) and binds to hormone response elements on DNA, which up- or down-regulates the expression of certain genes.
  • One of the primary functions of FXR activation is the suppression of cholesterol 7 alpha-hydroxylase (CYP7A1), the rate- limiting enzyme in bile acid synthesis from cholesterol.
  • CYP7A1 cholesterol 7 alpha-hydroxylase
  • FXR does not directly bind to the CYP7A1 promoter. Rather, FXR induces expression of small heterodimer partner (SHP), which then functions to inhibit transcription of the CYP7A1 gene. In this way, a negative feedback pathway is established in which synthesis of bile acids is inhibited when cellular levels are already high.
  • FXR sequences are publically available, for example from GenBank® sequence database (e.g., accession numbers
  • NP_001193906 human, protein
  • NP_001156976 mouse, protein
  • Metabolic disorder refers to any disorder that involves an alteration in the normal metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids or a combination thereof.
  • a metabolic disorder is associated with either a deficiency or excess in a metabolic pathway resulting in an imbalance in metabolism of nucleic acids, proteins, lipids, and or carbohydrates.
  • Factors affecting metabolism include, but are not limited to, the endocrine (hormonal) control system (e.g., the insulin pathway, the enteroendocrine hormones including GLP-1, GLP-2, oxyntomodulin, PYY or the like), the neural control system (e.g., GLP-1 in the brain) or the like.
  • metabolic disorders include and are not limited to diabetes, insulin resistance, dyslipidemia (such as an elevated serum lipids and or triglycerides, such as a serum LDL of at least 100 mg/dL, such as at least 130 mg/dL, at least 160 mg/dL or at least 200 mg/dL, such as 100 to 129 mg/dL, 130 to 159 mg/dL, 160 to 199 mg/dL or greater than 200 mg/dL, and/or such as a serum triglyceride of at least of at least 151 mg/dL, such as at least 200 mg/dL, or at least 500 mg/dL, such as 151 to 199 mg/dL, 200 to 499 mg/dL or greater than 499 mg/dL), metabolic syndrome, or the like.
  • dyslipidemia such as an elevated serum lipids and or triglycerides, such as a serum LDL of at least 100 mg/dL, such as at least 130 mg/dL, at least 160 mg/dL or at least
  • Methodabolic rate refers to the rate at which the subject uses energy. This is also known as the rate of metabolism, or the rate of energy consumption, and reflects the overall activity of the individual's metabolism.
  • basal metabolism refers to the minimum amount of energy required to maintain vital functions in an individual at complete rest, measured by the basal metabolic rate in a fasting individual who is awake and resting in a comfortably warm environment.
  • basal metabolic rate refers to the rate at which energy is used by an individual at rest. Basal metabolic rate is measured in humans by the heat given off per unit time, and expressed as the calories released per kilogram of body weight or per square meter of body surface per hour. The heart beating, breathing, maintaining body temperature, and other basic bodily functions all contribute to basal metabolic rate.
  • Basal metabolic rate can be determined to be the stable rate of energy metabolism measured in individuals under conditions of minimum environmental and physiological stress, or essentially at rest with no temperature change.
  • the basal metabolic rate among individuals can vary widely.
  • One example of an average value for basal metabolic rate is about 1 calorie per hour per kilogram of body weight.
  • Non-systemic or “minimally absorbed” as used herein refer to low systemic bioavailability and or absorption of an administered compound. In some instances a non- systemic compound is a compound that is substantially not absorbed systemically. In some embodiments, FXR agonist compositions described herein deliver an FXR agonist to the distal ileum, colon, and or rectum and not systemically (e.g., a substantial portion of the FXR agonist administered is not systemically absorbed).
  • the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is ⁇ 0.1%, ⁇ 0.3%, ⁇ 0.5%, ⁇ 0.6%, ⁇ 0.7%, ⁇ 0.8%, ⁇ 0.9%, ⁇ 1%, ⁇ 1.5%, ⁇ 2%, ⁇ 3%, or ⁇ 5% of the administered dose (wt. % or mol %).
  • the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is ⁇ 15% of the administered dose. In some embodiments, the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is ⁇ 25% of the administered dose.
  • a non-systemic FXR agonist is a compound that has lower systemic bioavailability relative to the systemic bioavailability of a systemic FXR agonist.
  • the bioavailability of a non-systemic FXR agonist described herein is ⁇ 30%, ⁇ 40%, ⁇ 50%, ⁇ 60%, or ⁇ 70% of the bioavailability of a systemic FXR agonist.
  • the serum concentration of the FXR agonist in the subject remains below the compound's EC 50 following administration (such as a level at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or even at least 50% below the compound's EC 50 ).
  • the compound's EC 50 is about 50 nM, following administration the serum concentration would be below 50 nM, such as less than 40 nM, less than 30 nM or less than 20 nM, for example 1 hour following administration.
  • compositions include preventing additional symptoms, preventing the underlying metabolic causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition, e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition and are intended to include prophylaxis.
  • the terms further include achieving a prophylactic benefit.
  • the compositions are optionally administered to a patient at risk of developing a particular disease (e.g., LAD A), to a patient reporting one or more of the physiological symptoms of a disease (e.g., LAD A), or to a patient at risk of reoccurrence of the disease (e.g., LAD A).
  • Subject may be used interchangeably herein and refer to mammals and non-mammals, e.g., suffering from LADA.
  • mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of the mammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like.
  • non-mammals include, but are not limited to, birds, fish, amphibians, and the like.
  • the mammal is a human.
  • Treating,” “treating” or “treatment,” and other grammatical equivalents as used herein, include alleviating, inhibiting or reducing symptoms, reducing or inhibiting severity of, reducing incidence of, prophylactic treatment of, reducing or inhibiting recurrence of, preventing, delaying onset of, delaying recurrence of, abating or ameliorating a disease or condition symptoms, ameliorating the underlying metabolic causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition, e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition, relieving the disease or condition, causing regression of the disease or condition, relieving a condition caused by the disease or condition, or stopping the symptoms of the disease or condition, wherein the disease can be LADA.
  • Therapeutic benefit means eradication or amelioration of the underlying disorder being treated, and/or the eradication or amelioration of one or more of the physiological symptoms associated with the underlying disorder, such that an improvement is observed in the patient.
  • Such methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists to the GI tract of a subject, such as one or more of the FXR agonists disclosed herein.
  • the absorption of these FXR agonists is substantially restricted to the intestinal lumen when delivered orally (e.g., serum levels of the compound are below the compound's EC 50 following administration of the compound, such as about 1 hour later).
  • administration of one or more FXR agonists results in activation of FXR transcriptional activity in the intestine, without substantially affecting other target tissues, such as liver or kidney.
  • Farnesoid X receptor is a key component in regulating metabolic homeostasis including glucose and lipid metabolism as well as bile acid (BA) homeostasis.
  • Fexaramine is a gut-specific FXR agonist that can reduce diet-induced weight gain, body- wide inflammation and hepatic glucose production, while enhancing thermogenesis and browning of white adipose tissue. It is shown herein that Fex restores pancreatic ⁇ cell functions with robustly enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in diabetic mice without body weight changes. It is shown that Fex potentiates bioenergetics to enhance GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells.
  • GSIS glucose-stimulated insulin secretion
  • Fex increases gene expression of glucagon- like peptide- 1 receptor (GLP-1 R) in pancreatic ⁇ cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in ⁇ cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia in ob/ob mice.
  • GLP-1 R glucagon-like peptide- 1 receptor
  • Fex analogs, including Fex-D are more effective at glucose lowering than Fex.
  • FXR farnesoid X receptor
  • these embodiments include compounds of Formula 1-35. Certain compounds are chiral, and all stereoisomers are included in this disclosure, as well as all geometric and structural isomers such as cis and trans isomers.
  • FXR Farnesoid X Receptor
  • R is selected from
  • R b is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl;
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide);
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro;
  • R fa and R ft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl;
  • L a and L b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi- bond;
  • L c and L d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or
  • X is not substituted with -R ⁇ IZ-R* 2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ; R x6 and R x7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, al
  • R a is cyclohexyl
  • R b is methyl
  • R ⁇ is H
  • X is not phenyl, 4-biphenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-(3,4-difluorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- acetylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methylthiophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenyl, 4- (4-tert-butylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-ethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3
  • R a is cyclohexyl
  • R ft is H and X is then R b is not methyl, ethyl or tert-butyl
  • R b is methyl, R fc is H and X is then R a is not cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl;
  • R a is cyclohexyl, R ft is H and X is then R b is not methyl or tert-butyl; if R a is cyclohexyl, R b is methyl, R is H and X is then
  • R h is not hydroxyl, (trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl-O, methoxy, O-benzyl, OCH 2 C0 2 Et, OC(0)CH 3 , OC(0)Ph or OS0 2 CH 3 ; and if R a is cyclohexyl, R b is methyl, R is H and X is then R h iis not -
  • R b is substituted with substituents that improve the compounds water solubility.
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl, each substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • R a is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups, or a lower PEG group, such as PEG 2, PEG 3, PEG 4, PEG 5, PEG 6, PEG 8, PEG 10.
  • X is not a benzopyran. , leading to compounds having the structure of formula 2
  • the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 3
  • R 1 is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or polycyclic
  • R 2 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl
  • Y is selected from N, N-0 (N-oxide) or C- R 3d
  • R 3a , R 3b , R 3c and R 3d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro
  • R 4a and R 4b are each independently selected from hydrogen (H), deuterium (D), halide or alkyl
  • L 1 and L 2 are independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-
  • R 5a , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d or R 5e is -R x -L x -R x2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR
  • L 1 and L 2 are both hydrogen or together form a pi-bond then at least one of the following conditions applies: Y is N or C-halogen; or R 1 is polycyclic; or R 4a is D; or R 5a is F, CI, I; or R 5d and R 5e together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; or R 5b and R 5c together form an aryl, cycloalkyl, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic or nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring, or any combination thereof.
  • R 2 is substituted with one or more groups that improve the compounds water solubility. In certain embodiments, R 2 is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • R 5a , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d or R 5e is selected from
  • R 5h is alkyl, alkenyl, hydrogen, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclic.
  • L 1 and L 2 together form a pi-bond, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 4
  • Y is CR , leading to compounds having the structure of formula 5
  • R 3d or R 5a or both are halogen, such as F, CI, Br or I, and R 1 , R 2 , R 3a , R 3b , R 3c , R 4a , R 4b , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d and R 5e are defined as for formula 3, above. In some working embodiments, R 3d or R 5a or both are F.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3a , R 3b , R 3c , R 4a , R 4b , R 5a , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d and R 5e are defined as for formula 3.
  • R 1 is polycyclic. This leads to compounds having the structure of formula 7
  • R 2 , R 3a , R 3b , R 3c , R 4a , R 4b , R 5a , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d , R 5e and Y are defined as for formula 3 above.
  • the polycyclic is selected from
  • polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], [3.3.2], 3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], [3.3.2], 3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], [3.3.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl.
  • the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2
  • R 5c is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring.
  • nitrogen-containing heteroaryl rings include, but are not limited to, pyridine, pyrazole, pyrrole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, triazole, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, benzopyrazole, benzimidazole, indole, quinoline, indazole, purine, quinoxaline, and acridine.
  • the compounds have the structure of formula 8
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3a , R 3b , R 3c , R 4a , R 4b , R 5a , R 5b , R 5d , R 5e and Y are defined as for formula 3, R 6a , R 6c , R 6d and R 6g are each independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl, R 6h is selected from H, D, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, and Z is selected from N, CH or C-alkyl. In certain working embodiments, Z is N and/or R 6h is methyl. In some examples R 6a , R 6c , R 6d and R 6g are all hydrogen. In particular examples, Y is C-R 3d and at least one of R 3d and R 5a is F.
  • R 5c is a 4-aminophenyl, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 9
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3a , R 3b , R 3c , R 3d , R 4 , R 5a , R 5b , R 5d and R 5e are defined as for formula 5, R 6a , R 6b , R 6c and R 6d are each independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl, G is a lone pair of electrons or an oxygen, and R 6e and R 6f are each independently selected from alkyl, H or cycloalkyl, with the provisos that R 3d or R 5a or both are halogen, or R 4 is D, or R 1 is polycyclic, or any combination thereof. In working embodiments, R 6e and R 6f are both methyl.
  • compounds having formula 9 are N-oxides, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 10
  • R 4a is D
  • R 4b is H
  • R 2 is methyl
  • both R 4a and R 4b are D.
  • R 1 is cyclohexyl.
  • compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 11
  • R a is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide)
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro
  • R fa and R ft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalky
  • X is aryl, heterocyclic or
  • L a and L b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; L c and L d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -
  • R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, - C(0)OR x6
  • the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 12
  • R 5a , R 5b , R 5c , R 5d or R 5e is -RMZ-R* 2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently
  • the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 13
  • R is selected from
  • L b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond;
  • L c and L d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(L c )(L d )) s -; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1 ;
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide);
  • R c , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro;
  • prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 14
  • R a is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide)
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro
  • R fa and R ft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl
  • X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl
  • R y and R z are selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic alkyl, aryl, or hetero
  • R y and R z together form a 5-membered heteroalkyl ring substituted with an ascorbate moiety, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 15
  • prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 16
  • R a is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide)
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro
  • R fa and R ft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl
  • X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl
  • L a and L b are independently H, D or alkyl or together form a ⁇ -bond, a cyclopropyl
  • prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 17
  • L a and L b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond;
  • L c and L d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl;
  • W is selected from O or -(C(L c )(L d )) s -; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
  • n is 0 or 1;
  • R a is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic;
  • R b is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl;
  • Y is CR g , N or N-0 (N-oxide);
  • R c , R d , R e and R g are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy
  • R k and R m together form a 5-membered ring, leading to compounds having a s
  • each R n is independently selected from H, alkyl, or a metal salt such as Na, K, or Li.
  • X is heteroaryl or heterocyclic, and in particular embodiments, X is pyridine or piperidine.
  • X is a phenyl substituted with an aryl or heteroaryl group.
  • X is a phenyl substituted with the aryl or heteroaryl group selected from benzoxazine, dihydrobenzoxazine, quinoxaline,
  • X is selected from
  • prodrug compounds satisfying one of formulas 14-18 may also have intrinsic activity as FXR agonists, as well as acting as a prodrug for a compound having FXR activity.
  • the compound is methyl (E)-3-(3-(W-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[1 ,1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- ")cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate embodiments, the compound is methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
  • kits that include any FXR agonist (or composition containing such an agonist) described herein and a device for localized delivery within a region of the intestines, such as the ileum or colon.
  • the device is a syringe, bag, or a pressurized container.
  • FXR Farnesoid X Receptor
  • R ! -R 15 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, D-heteroaliphatic, or -(CH 2 ) nl -R 150 - (CH 2 ) n2 -R 151 , wherein nl and n2 are independently selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, R 150 is O, NR 16 , or absent, and R 151 is carboxyl ester or amino; R 16 is selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R a and R b are
  • R ! -R 16 is -R x -L x -R x2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ; R x6 and R x7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; R x2 is selected from -C(0)L x2 R x8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L x2 is a bond or NR x3 ; R x8 is H, aliphatic,
  • At least one of R ! -R 16 is or comprises deuterium.
  • R 7 may be H, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
  • R 7 is alkyl or deuterated alkyl, and in certain embodiments, R 7 is isopropyl or deuterated isopropyl, having from 1 to 7 deuterium atoms.
  • At least one of R ! -R 5 is a halogen.
  • R 2 and R 3 are both fluoro.
  • R 16 is hydrogen
  • R 10 and R 11 independently are alkyl or deuterated alkyl, and in certain examples, R 10 and R 11 independently are methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
  • R a and R b together form a pi-bond, leading to compounds have the structure of formula 20
  • R ! -R 16 are as defined above with respect to formula 19, and at least one of R ! -R 15 is or comprises deuterium.
  • R a and R b are both hydrogen, leading to compounds having a structure of formula 21
  • X is N or CR 37 ;
  • R 21 -R 34 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R is hydrogen, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R 37 is hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
  • R 21 -R 37 is -R x -L x -R x2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ; R x6 and R x7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; R x2 is selected from -C(0)L x2 R x8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L x2 is a bond or NR x3 ; R x8 is H, aliphatic,
  • R 35 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, deuterated alkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl.
  • R 35 is cycloalkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl, typically cyclohexyl or deuterated cyclohexyl, having from 1 to 11 deuterium atoms.
  • R 36 is hydrogen
  • R 32 is carboxyl and/or R 34 is CF 3 .
  • R 23 is halogen, and in certain embodiments R 23 is chloro.
  • the compound is chiral, and in certain embodiments, the compound is the /S-stereoisomer.
  • X is N, leadin to compounds having a structure of formula 23
  • R 21 -R 36 is as defined above with respect to formula 22, and at least one of R
  • X is CH, leading to compounds having the structure of formula
  • R 21 -R 36 is as defined above with respect to formula 22.
  • Exemplary compounds having the structure of formula 22 include:
  • R 41 -R 48 and R 52 -R 55 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano,
  • R 49 - R 51 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic;
  • R 56 is amino, cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as 5-, 6-, or 7- membered cycloamino;
  • Y and Z are independently N or CR 57 ; and each R 57 independently is selected from deuterium, halogen, CF 3 , N0 2 , OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
  • R 41 -R 57 is -R x -L x -R x2 , where R x is selected from O, NR x3 , sulfonyl or S; R x3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; L x is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CR x4 R x5 ; R x4 and R x5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)OR x6 , or -C(0)NR x6 R x7 ; R x6 and R x7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; R x2 is selected from -C(0)L x2 R x8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L x2 is a bond or NR x3 ; R x8 is H, aliphatic,
  • At least one of R 41 -R 56 is or comprises deuterium.
  • R 51 is an aliphatic or D-aliphatic, and in certain embodiments, R 51 is a methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
  • R 49 and R 50 independently are hydrogen or deuterium.
  • R 41 and R 45 independently are aliphatic or D-aliphatic, and in particular embodiments, R 41 and R 45 are methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
  • R is a cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as pyrrolidine, 2-methylpyrrolidine, morpholine, 4-methylpiperazine, piperidine, or azepane (homopiperidine) .
  • Y is N and Z is N leading to compounds having a structure of formula 26
  • Y is CH and Z is CH leading to compounds having a structure of formula 27
  • Y is N and Z is CH leading to compounds having a structure of formula 28
  • R 100 and R 101 are independently H, D, lower alkyl, halogen, or CF 3 ;
  • R 102 is lower alkyl;
  • R 103 and R 104 are independently H, D, lower alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , OH, O-alkyl, or O-polyhaloalkyl;
  • R 105 and R 106 are each independently H, D, halogen, alkyl or deuterated alkyl;
  • R 107 and R 108 are each independently H, D, alkyl, deuterated alkyl or halogen.
  • At least one of R 100 , R 101 , R 102 , R 103 , R 104 , R 105 , R 106 , R 107 and R 108 is or comprises deuterium. In some embodiments, at least one of R 105 , R 106 , R 107 and R 108 is or comprises deuterium. In other embodiments, at least one of R 107 and R 108 is halogen, and may be fluoro.
  • the compound has a structure of formula 31
  • G 1 is CH or N; G 2 is O or NH; R 100 and R 101 are independently H, lower alkyl, halogen, or CF 3 ; R 102 is lower alkyl; R 103 and R 104 are independently H, lower alkyl, halogen, CF 3 , OH, O-alkyl, or O-polyhaloalkyl.
  • Exemplary compounds having a structure of formula 30 or formula 31 include
  • R 205 is selected from the group consisting of COOR 210 , CONR 21 ! R 212 , tetrazolyl,
  • R 206 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotnazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, 0-C 1-6 alkyl, 0-halo-C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 alkyl, halo-C 1-6 alkyl, C 3-6 cycloalkyl, D and halogen;
  • R 207 is selected from N or CH;
  • R 208 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of D, C 1-6 alkyl, halo-C 1-6 alkyl, halogen and CF 3 ;
  • R 209 is selected from
  • R CH, N, NO, CD
  • R 215 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C 1-3 alkyl, C 3 . 6 cylcoalkyl, C 4 . 5 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein C 1-3 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from halogen, hydroxy or C 1-6 alkoxy;
  • R 216 and R 217 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, D, Ci- 3 alkyl, C 1-3 haloalkyl, C 1-3 alkoxy, C 1-3 haloalkoxy, D-aliphatic and halogen.
  • R 218 and R 219 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, R 218 and R 219 are both H. In other embodiments, at least one of R 218 and R 219 is D.
  • the compound comprises at least one deuterium.
  • R 206 and/or R 208 comprise at least one deuterium.
  • R 214 is CD.
  • at least one of R 216 and R 217 is or comprises deuterium.
  • R 205 .R 206 i s selected from
  • R 209 is xemplary compounds having the s
  • R is selected from the group consisting of COOR 322 , CONR 323 R 324 , tetrazolyl or H, with R 322 independently selected from the group consisting of H, or lower alkyl, and R 323 and R 324 independently from each other selected from the group consisting of H, lower alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, C 1-6 alkylene-R 325 , S0 2 -C 1-6 alkyl wherein R 325 is selected from the group consisting of COOH, OH, or S0 3 H;
  • R 319 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotriazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl, or halogen;
  • R 320 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, halogen, D or CF 3 ;
  • R 3 6 is CH, N, NO;
  • R327 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d-C 3 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cylcoalkyl, C 4 -C 5 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein C 1-3 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from halogen, hydroxy or C 1-6 alkoxy,
  • R 328 and R 329 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci- C 3 alkyl, d-C 3 haloalkyl, d-C 3 alkoxy, d-C 3 haloalkoxy and halogen.
  • R 334 and R 335 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, at least one of R 334 and R 335 are D.
  • R 320 is substituted with at least one halogen or deuterium.
  • R 318 is selected from the group consisting of COOR 322 , CONR 323 R 324 , tetrazolyl or H, with R 322 , R 323 and R 324 independently selected from the group consisting of H, lower alkyl;
  • R 319 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotriazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl;
  • R 320 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, halogen, D or CF 3 ;
  • R 3 6 is CH, N, NO;
  • R 327 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d-C 3 alkyl, d-C 3 haloalkyl, C 3 - C 6 cylcoalkyl, C 4 -C 5 alkylcycloalkyl;
  • R 328 and R 329 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d- C 3 alkyl, d-C 3 haloalkyl, d-C 3 alkoxy, d-C 3 haloalkoxy and halogen.
  • compounds having the structure of formula 33 have the structure of formula 34
  • compounds having structure of formula 33 have the structure of formula 35,
  • R 33 is CH, CD or N;
  • R 330 and R 331 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, D, lower alkyl, halogen and CF 3 ;
  • R 3i9 is se i ecte( i f rom
  • R 327 is selected from the group consisting of isopropyl, t-butyl and cyclopropyl;
  • R 328 and R 329 are independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, d- C3 alkyl, methoxy and trifluoromethoxy;
  • R 334 and R 335 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, at least one of R 33 ' and R 335 are D.
  • R 320 is optionally substituted phenyl, preferably substituted with one substituent, preferably halogen, or two substituents, preferably both halogen or one halogen one deuterium;
  • R is CH
  • R 327 is cycloalkyl
  • R 328 and R 329 each are halogen.
  • Exemplary compounds having the structure of formulas 33, 34 or 35 include:
  • kits that include any FXR agonist (or composition containing such an agonist) described herein and a device for localized delivery within a region of the intestines, such as the ileum or colon.
  • the device is a syringe, bag, or a pressurized container.
  • compositions comprising at least one compound according to any of formulas 1-35, which can be used with embodiments of the method provided herein.
  • compositions comprising at least one of the disclosed compounds can be formulated for use in human or veterinary medicine. Particular formulations of a disclosed pharmaceutical composition may depend, for example, on the mode of administration (e.g., oral).
  • disclosed pharmaceutical compositions include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in addition to at least one or two or more active ingredients, such as a compound or compounds disclosed herein.
  • other medicinal or pharmaceutical agents for example, with similar, related or complementary effects on the affliction being treated (such as LAD A), can also be included as active ingredients in a pharmaceutical composition.
  • one or more of the disclosed compounds can be formulated with one or more of (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 of) a statin, an insulin sensitizing drug, alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, amylin agonist, dipeptidyl-peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), meglitinide, sulfonylurea, peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)- gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglitazone,
  • rivoglitazone or troglitazone
  • aleglitazar farglitazar
  • muraglitazar or tesaglitazar
  • GLP glucagon- like peptide
  • anti-inflammatory agent e.g., oral corticosteroid
  • nicotinamide ribonucleoside and analogs thereof that promote NAD+ production of which is a substrate for many enzymatic reactions such as p450s which are a target of FXR (for examples see Yang et ah, J. Med. Chem., 50:6458-61, 2007, herein incorporated by reference) and the like.
  • compositions can depend on the particular mode of administration being employed.
  • conventional non-toxic solid carriers can include, without limitation, pharmaceutical grades of sugars, such as mannitol or lactose, polysaccharides, such as starch, or salts of organic acids, such as magnesium stearate.
  • pharmaceutical compositions can optionally contain amounts of auxiliary substances (e.g., excipients), such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, and pH buffering agents and the like; for example, sodium acetate or sorbitan monolaurate.
  • the pharmaceutical composition includes a sufficient amount of a disclosed compound to have a desired therapeutic effect.
  • the disclosed compound constitutes greater than 0% to less than 100% of the pharmaceutical composition, such as 10% or less, 20% or less, 30% or less, 40% or less, 50% or less, 60% or less, 70% or less, 80% or less, 90% or less, or 90% to less than 100% of the pharmaceutical composition.
  • the disclosed pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, N-oxide or combination thereof, of a disclosed compound. Additionally, the pharmaceutical composition may comprise one or more polymorph of the disclosed compound.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are salts of a free base form of a compound that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the free base. These salts may be derived from inorganic or organic acids. Non- limiting examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, hydriodic acid, and phosphoric acid.
  • Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, pyruvic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid,
  • methanesulfonic acid methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, methyl sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, formic acid, trichloroacetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, gluconic acid, asparagic acid, aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, and the like.
  • compounds disclosed herein according to formulas 1-35 are formulated to have a suitable particle size.
  • a suitable particle size may be one which reduces or substantially precludes separation of the components of the composition, e.g., no separation between the drug and any other components of the composition, such as a second drug, a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a corticosteroid, an antibiotic or any combination thereof. Additionally, the particle size may be selected to ensure the composition is suitable for delivery, such as oral delivery.
  • the composition further includes an enteric coating.
  • an enteric coating is a polymer barrier applied to an oral medication to help protect the drug from the acidity and/or enzymes of the stomach, esophagus and/or mouth.
  • this coating can reduce or substantially prevent systemic delivery of the disclosed compound, thereby allowing substantially selective delivery to the intestines.
  • the enteric coating will not dissolve in the acid environment of the stomach, which has an acidic, pH of about 3, but will dissolve in the alkaline environments of the small intestine, with, for example, a pH of about 7 to 9.
  • Materials used for enteric coating include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, waxes, shellac, plastics and plant fibers.
  • the coating may comprise methyl acrylate-methacrylic acid copolymers, cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate (hypromellose acetate succinate), polyvinyl acetate phthalate (PVAP), methyl methacrylate-methacrylic acid copolymers, shellac, cellulose acetate trimellitate, sodium alginate, or any combination thereof.
  • Embodiments of a method of making compounds that have the structure of formulas 1- 18 are also disclosed herein.
  • a general method of making the compounds comprises reacting an aldehyde with a first amine to form an imine, reacting the imine with a reducing agent to form a second amine, and reacting the second amine with an activated carboxylic acid derivative or a carboxylic acid to form an amide.
  • inventions further comprise contacting the aldehyde with a boronic acid, contacting the amide with a vinyl ester, contacting the first amine with a vinyl ester, contacting the amide with a boronic acid, or any combination thereof.
  • the reducing agent is a deuterated reducing agent, and the compound comprises deuterium.
  • a protected aromatic amine 2 was coupled to a vinyl ester 4 by a suitable coupling technique to form compound 6.
  • the amine of the aromatic amine 2 was protected by a suitable protecting group, as will be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art. Additional information concerning protecting groups is provided by Greene and Wuts,
  • exemplary amine protecting groups include, but are not limited to, tert-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), benzyl, benzoyl, or benzoyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).
  • the technique is a Stille coupling.
  • coupling comprised treating the protected aromatic amine with a vinyl group in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as a palladium catalyst, and optionally, a suitable phosphine compound.
  • Suitable palladium catalysts include, but are not limited to, Bis(dibenzylideneacetone)palladium
  • Pd 2 (dba) 3 was used as a catalyst with tri(o-tolyl)phosphine (P(o-tol) 3 ) as the phosphine.
  • the coupling reaction is conducted in any suitable solvent, such as dimethylformamide, at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction.
  • the effective temperature is from greater than 0 °C to at least 130 °C, such as from about 20 °C to about 110 °C, from about 80 °C to about 100 °C. In certain working embodiments the temperature was about 95 °C.
  • the amine protecting group of compound 6 was removed by treatment with a suitable reagent. Suitable de-protection reagents and conditions for a specific protecting group can be selected by a person of ordinary skill in the art, and is further disclosed by consulting Greene and Wuts. In certain working embodiments, trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) was used to remove a Boc protecting group. In certain disclosed embodiments, the de-protected amine (not shown) was then treated with an aldehyde, such as aldehyde 8, in the presence of a reducing agent. In other embodiments, the amine was treated with an aldehyde, and subsequently treated by a reducing agent. The reducing agent is selected to place a desired R 4 group into the molecule.
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • R 4 is hydrogen; in others it is deuterium.
  • Suitable reducing agents include, but are not limited to, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, sodium triacetoxyborodeuteride, sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium cyanoborodeuteride, sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride, sodium borodeuteride or lithium borodeuteride.
  • Suitable solvents for the reduction include, but are not limited to, toluene, halogenated solvents, THF, hexanes, cyclohexane, acetic acid, deuterated acetic acid, alcohols such as methanol, ethanol propanol, isopropanol, or deuterated alcohols such as methanol-cU.
  • the reducing agent was NaBH(OAc) 3 , NaBD(OAc) 3 , NaBD 3 CN, NaBH 4 or NaBD 4 and the solvent was THF, CD 3 OD, acetic acid or deuterated acetic acid.
  • a carboxylic acid or an activated carboxylic acid derivative such as an acid chloride, an acid bromide, or an anhydride.
  • activated carboxylic acid derivatives are suitable for a particular carboxylic acid.
  • a carboxylic acid may be coupled to the amine using a suitable coupling reagent known to a person of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Exemplary coupling reagents include, but are not limited to, HATU, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCCI, DCC) or l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, EDCI, ED AC).
  • the carboxylic acid was activated by forming an acid chloride.
  • the acylation reactions proceed in a suitable solvent, typically an aprotic solvent, such as pyridine, dichloromethane, chloroform, dioxane, toluene, DMF, THF or acetonitrile.
  • the reaction with a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid derivative may proceed in the presence of one or more additional compounds, such as potassium carbonate, triethylamine,
  • the reactions are performed at a temperature effective to facilitate the reaction, such as from greater than about -10 °C to greater than about 120 °C, typically from about 5 °C to about 90 °C, more typically from about 25 °C to about 65 °C.
  • compound 14 was treated with a boronic acid 16, in a Suzuki-type coupling.
  • the coupling was performed in the presence of a catalyst effective to facilitate the coupling reaction, and optionally in the presence of one or more additional compounds.
  • Typical catalysts for a Suzuki coupling are palladium or nickel catalysts, including but not limited to, NiCl 2 (dppf), NiCl 2 (dppp), Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd(OAC) 2 or PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 4 . In working embodiments the catalyst was Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 .
  • Typical additional compounds include, but are not limited to, triphenylphosphine (PPh 3 ), and/or bases such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, triethylamine, sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide, tripotassium phosphate or any combination thereof.
  • the additional compound was sodium carbonate.
  • the coupling reaction is performed in any suitable solvent, such as DMF, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol, propanol, benzene, toluene, THF, dioxane, water or any combination thereof.
  • DMF-ethanol-water was used as the solvent.
  • boronic acid 16 was first coupled to aldehyde 8.
  • the resulting product 20 was then treated with an amine compound 22 in a reductive amination step to form compound 24.
  • Compound 24 was then acylated using acylating reagent 12 to form compound 26, which was then coupled to vinyl ester 4 to form compound 18.
  • Scheme 3 Another variation of Scheme 1 is shown in Scheme 3.
  • the compounds are made using a solid-phase synthetic method as used for the synthesis of fexaramine in U.S. Patent No. 7,647,217, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • protected amine 6, where R is hydrogen is immobilized onto a solid support 34, such as a bead or resin, typically Merrifield resin, through the action of a suitable base, for example, cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate, to make conjugate 36.
  • a suitable base for example, cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate
  • the reductive amination, acylation and boronic acid coupling steps then proceed on the immobilized compound as described for Scheme 1, making conjugates 38, 40 and 42 respectively.
  • Conjugate 42 is then treated with an alkoxide salt, such as sodium methoxide, to release the desired compound 18 from the solid support.
  • an alternative reaction pathway was followed.
  • Scheme 4 outlines an exemplary alternative route.
  • a halogenated nitrobenzene 28 was coupled to vinyl ester 4 in the presence of a suitable catalyst and an additional compound (not shown) to form compound 30.
  • the catalyst was Pd(OAc) 2
  • the additional compound was sodium acetate.
  • the nitro group of compound 30 was then reduced to an amine by a suitable reagent to form amine 32.
  • Suitable reagents include, but are not limited to, tin chloride, iron powder in an acid medium, zinc powder or catalytic hydrogenation using a transition metal catalyst comprising palladium, platinium, nickel, rhodium or ruthenium.
  • tin chloride (SnCl 2 ) was used as the reducing agent.
  • Amine 32 was then treated with an aldehyde 8 in a de-hydration reaction.
  • Suitable dehydrating agents include, but are not limited to, an acid catalyst such as />ara-toluene sulfonic acid, a base such as triethylamine, malononitrile, molecular sieve, magnesium sulfate, sodium sulfate, or any combination thereof.
  • Suitable solvents for the de-hydration reaction include toluene, xylenes, DMSO, DMF, THF, alcohols such as methanol or any combination thereof.
  • Resulting imine compound 34 was then treated with a suitable reducing agent to form amine 10.
  • a deuterated reducing agent was used.
  • sodium cyanodeuteroborohydride was used, and in others sodium deuteroborohydride was used.
  • Any suitable, non-protonated solvent can be used, and in some working embodiments the solvent was methanol-cU and in others it was THF.
  • Amine 10 was then treated with acylating reagent 12, as described above with reference to Scheme 1, to form compound 14.
  • the amine was treated with carboxylic acids in the presence of HATU and diisopropylethylamine in DMF.
  • the amine was treated with carboxylic acid chlorides in dichloromethane in the presence of triethylamine.
  • Scheme 5 One exemplary method of making compounds having the structure of formula 13 is shown in Scheme 5. This method is a modification of the method of Lee and Hartwig, J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 3402-3415.
  • compound 20 is reacted with a catalyst 22 and a base 24 in a suitable solvent, to form compound 26.
  • Leaving group LG on compound 20 is any suitable leaving group, such as a halide, mesylate, tosylate or trifluoromethylsulfonate.
  • Catalyst 22 is any catalyst that facilitates the formation of compound 26. Suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to, palladium catalysts such as Pd(OAc) 2 , and may also comprise one or more ligands, such as PCy 3 , or sterically hindered N-heterocyclic carbine ligands.
  • the amount of the catalyst used is any suitable amount to catalyze the reaction at a suitable rate, such as from about 1 mol% to greater than about 20 mol%, preferably from about 5 mol% to about 10 mol%.
  • Base 24 is any suitable base that facilitates the reaction. In some embodiments an excess of the base is used, such as from greater than 1 equivalent to greater than about 5 equivalents, preferably from about 1.1 equivalents to about 2 equivalents.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, tert- butoxide salts, such as sodium, lithium or potassium tert-butoxide.
  • the solvent can be any solvent suitable to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments the solvent is 1, 4-dioxane.
  • Embodiments of a method of making prodrugs of compounds having formulas 1-13 are also disclosed herein.
  • One general method of making prodrugs is disclosed by Poon, et al.Bioorg. med. Chem. Lett. 2005, 15: 2259-2263, and is shown in Scheme 6. Briefly, the method comprises making the thioester of the compound, and forming the ortho ester or imidate.
  • ester compound 30 is reacted with reagent suitable to form thioester compound 32.
  • Suitable reagents include, but are not limited to, Lawesson's reagent or P 2 S 5 .
  • the reaction is performed in a suitable solvent, usually an aprotic solvent such as toluene, acetonitrile, cyclohexane, dichloromethane, or chloroform.
  • the reaction may also be heated, such as to reflux.
  • the thioester compound 32 is then reacted with reagents suitable to form the desired prodrug, in the presence of a metal salt and a base.
  • the metal salt is any metal salt suitable to mediate the desulfurization-condensation reaction between the thioester compound 32 and the alcohol or amine.
  • Suitable metal salts include, but are not limited to, silver salts such as AgoTf.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to organic bases such as triethylamine or
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, acetonitrile, DMF, dimethylacetyl, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
  • thioester 32 is reacted with dibenzylascorbate, AgOTf and triethylamine in acetonitrile.
  • An intermediate compound is formed initially (not shown) which is then reacted with hydrogen in the presence of a palladium catalyst in alcohol to form compound 34.
  • Compound 36 is formed by reacting compound 32 with hydroxylamine, in the presence of AgOTf and triethylamine in acetonitrile.
  • the intermediate compound (not shown) is then reacted with 2-bromoacetic acid and sodium hydroxide, to form compound 36.
  • Compound 38 is made by reacting compound 32 with serine-OMe in the presence of AgOTf and
  • compound 40 is reacted with a methylating agent, such as methyl trifluoromethanesulfonate, in a suitable solvent to make compound 42.
  • suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as dichloromethane and chloroform.
  • Compound 42 is reacted with a metal alkoxide solution, such as sodium methoxide in methanol, to form compound 44, an exemplary compound satisfying formula 17.
  • compound 44 is further reacted with dimethyl tartrate in a vacuum to form compound 46, an exemplary compound satisfying formula 18.
  • an indole acetonitrile 51 is treated with a suitable protecting group.
  • Scheme 8 illustrates using di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, in the presence of a base and in a suitable solvent, to form a BOC-protected indole (not shown).
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, aprotic solvents, such as dichloromethane, dichloroethane, THF, chloroform, or combinations thereof.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, 4- dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP), diiospropylethylamine, or combinations thereof.
  • the BOC- protected indole is further reacted with lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (LiHMDS) in a suitable, aprotic solvent such as THF or ether, and at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 52.
  • the effective temperature is from about -100 °C to about -50 °C, such as from about -80 °C to about -60 °C.
  • a suitable alkyl halide is then added to the reaction mixture, and the reaction mixture is warmed, or allowed to warm, to room temperature, such as to from about 20 °C to 25 °C.
  • alkyl portion of the alkyl halide will correspond to the desired R a and/or R b group.
  • R a and/or R b is methyl
  • a suitable alkyl halide may be methyl iodide.
  • R a and R b are alkyl
  • an excess of LiHMDS and alkyl halide are used in the reaction, such as about 2.5 equivalents.
  • only one of R a or R b is alkyl, and the other is hydrogen, then only 1 equivalent of LiHMDS and alkyl halide is used.
  • Compound 52 is then deprotected, such as by removal of the BOC group, to form the deprotected indole compound (not shown).
  • Suitable deprotection methods are known to persons of ordinary skill in the art and typically include reacting with an acid or acidic solution, including, but not limited to, trifluoroacetic acid or hydrochloric acid.
  • the cyano group on the deprotected indole compound is then reduced by a suitable reducing agent, such as lithium aluminum hydride (LAH, L1AIH4), at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 53.
  • suitable solvents for the reduction reaction include any aprotic solvent that will not react with the reducing agent, such as THF and ethers.
  • the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 100 °C, such as from about 40 °C to about 80 °C.
  • Compound 53 is then reacted with a halopyruvate, such as R c -bromopyruvate, where R c is the desired ester.
  • the reaction is conducted in the presence of an acid, and in a suitable solvent and at an effective temperature, to form compound 54.
  • exemplary bromopyruvates include ethyl bromopyruvate and isopropyl bromopyruvate.
  • Suitable acids include aqueous acid such as hydrochloric acid.
  • Suitable solvents include protic solvents, such as alcohols. In some embodiments, ethanol is used as the solvent.
  • the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 100 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 80 °C.
  • Compound 54 is then reacted with a base at a temperature effective to form compound 55.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine or combinations thereof.
  • the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 110 °C.
  • Compound 55 is then reacted with a suitable acid or activated acid derivative, such as an acid chloride, to form the desired compound 56.
  • the reaction is conducted in a suitable solvent, and in the presence of a suitable base.
  • suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate.
  • the reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
  • Scheme 9 Another exemplary embodiment of a general method of making a compound having the structure of formula 19 is shown in Scheme 9. This method is a modification of the method disclosed by Wang, et al. Tetrahedron Letters, 2011, 52, 3295-3297, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • a pyrroloindoline 57 is reacted with an acetylene ester 58 in a suitable solvent, and at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 59.
  • the reaction is performed under an inert atmosphere, such as nitrogen or argon.
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO or acetonitrile.
  • the effective temperature is from greater than 0 °C to greater than about 100 °C, such as from about 10 °C to about 50 °C, or about 20 °C to about 30 °C.
  • the reaction proceeds in the presence of a catalyst.
  • Suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to, copper halides, such as copper iodide, copper bromide, or copper chloride, salts of vitamin C such as sodium salt, potassium salt or lithium salt, or combinations thereof.
  • R e can be hydrogen or methyl.
  • compound 59 is demethylated prior to acylation (not shown).
  • the demethylation can be performed by any suitable method such as by reacting the tertiary amine with 1- chloroethylchloroformate in a suitable solvent.
  • Solvents suitable for the demethylation include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as dichloromethane, dichloroethane and chloroform, or THF.
  • the reaction mixture is evaporated and then heated with an alcohol such as methanol for a time effective to form the secondary amine.
  • the effective time is from greater than 1 minute to greater than 1 hour, such as from about 10 minutes to about 30 minutes.
  • Compound 59, or the demethylated compound 59 is then reacted with a suitable acid or activated acid derivative, such as an acid chloride, to form the desired compound 60.
  • a suitable solvent include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate.
  • the reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
  • Scheme 10 One exemplary embodiment of a method of making a compound having formula 22 is shown in Scheme 10. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other suitable methods for making compounds having the structure of formula 22 can be determined.
  • a protected diamine 61 such as a BOC-protected diamine
  • an aldehyde 62 in a suitable solvent for from about 10 minutes to greater than 60 minutes, such as from about 20 minutes to about 40 minutes.
  • suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, alcohols, such as methanol or ethanol, water or polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF or DMSO, or combinations thereof.
  • Acid 63 and isocyanide 64 are then added. After an amount of time effective to allow the reaction to proceed, the resulting product is deprotected, such as by adding a suitable acid 65 for removing the BOC protecting group.
  • the effective amount of time is from about 30 minutes to greater than 12 hours, such as from about 1 hour to about 4 hours.
  • Suitable acids are those known to a person of ordinary skill in the art to remove the protecting group, and include, but are not limited to, hydrochloric acid and trifluoroacetic acid.
  • the reaction mixture is left for an amount of time effective to facilitate a reaction to form compound 66, such as from about 6 hours to greater than 24 hours, such as from about 12 hours to about 20 hours.
  • the reaction mixture is agitated, such as by stirring or shaking, for at least some of the reaction time, and in some embodiments, for substantially all of the reaction time.
  • the reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, such as from about 10 °C to greater than about 50 °C, typically from about 20 °C to about 40 °C.
  • Scheme 11 Another exemplary method of making a compound having the structure of formula 22 is shown in Scheme 11. The method is a modification of the method disclosed in WO2004087714, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • a haloindole 67 such as a bromo indole
  • an ester compound 67a which comprises a desired R group and a leaving group LG
  • the leaving group can be any suitable leaving group, such as a halide, triflate, mesalate or tosylate.
  • the reaction is performed in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, and in a suitable solvent, such as DMF or THF.
  • Compound 68 is typically saponified to an acid (not shown) by any suitable method known to a person of ordinary skill in the art, such as by reacting the acid with a hydroxide base, or by treatment with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid.
  • the acid is then typically activated, such as by forming an acid chloride, and then reacted with aniline to form compound 69.
  • the reaction is conducted in a suitable solvent, and in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof.
  • Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate.
  • the reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
  • Compound 69 is then reacted with a boronic acid (not shown) in a Suzuki-type coupling to form compound 70.
  • the boronic acid is an aromatic boronic acid.
  • the coupling is performed in the presence of a catalyst effective to facilitate the coupling reaction, and optionally in the presence of one or more additional compounds.
  • Typical catalysts for a Suzuki coupling are palladium or nickel catalysts, including but not limited to, NiCb(dppf), NiCl 2 (dppp), Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 , Pd(OAC) 2 or PdCl 2 (PPh 3 ) 4 .
  • Typical additional compounds include, but are not limited to, triphenylphosphine (PPh 3 ), and/or bases such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, triethylamine, sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide, tripotassium phosphate or any combination thereof.
  • the coupling reaction is performed in any suitable solvent, such as DMF, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol, propanol, benzene, toluene, THF, dioxane, water or any combination thereof.
  • an amine 71 is reacted with an aldehyde 72.
  • the reaction typically is conducted in a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, such as methanol or ethanol, water, or polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF or DMSO, or combinations thereof, for from about 10 minutes to greater than 60 minutes, such as from about 20 minutes to about 40 minutes.
  • An isocyanide 73 and a suitable azide 74 are then added, and the reaction mixture is left for an amount of time effective to facilitate a reaction to form compound 75, such as from about 6 hours to greater than 48 hours, such as from about 12 hours to about 24 hours.
  • One possible suitable azide is trimethylsilyl azide.
  • Scheme 13 provides one possible reaction mechanism for the reaction described in Scheme 12.
  • the amine 71 reacts with the aldehyde 72 with the loss of water, to form an imine 76.
  • the imine 76 then reacts with the isocyanide 73 to form an intermediate 77, which then reacts with the azide compound 74, to form an intermediate 78.
  • the intermediate 78 then cyclizes to form the desired compound 75.
  • Scheme 14 Another exemplary embodiment of a method of making a compound having the structure of formula 25 is shown in Scheme 14. The method is a modification of the method disclosed by Chen, et al. Synthesis, 2010, No. 9, 1505-1511, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
  • an aromatic halide compound 80 is reacted with an imidazole compound 81 in the presence of a copper catalyst, such as copper (I) bromide and an additional compound 82 to form compound 83.
  • a copper catalyst such as copper (I) bromide
  • an additional compound 82 to form compound 83.
  • the reaction is performed in a suitable solvent and in the presence of a suitable base.
  • Suitable solvents include aprotic solvents such as DMSO or DMF.
  • Suitable bases include any base that will facilitate the reaction, such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, lithium carbonate or cesium carbonate.
  • the reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 80 °C.
  • farnesoid X receptor agonists such as those disclosed herein, as well as compositions including such compounds, are used to treat or prevent LADA.
  • Orally delivered fexaramine (Fex) (Downes et ah, Mol Cell 11 :1079-1092, 2003) is poorly absorbed, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation. It is shown herein that Fex restores pancreatic ⁇ cell functions with robustly enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in diabetic mice without body weight changes. It is shown that Fex potentiates bioenergetics to enhance GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells.
  • GSIS glucose-stimulated insulin secretion
  • Fex increases gene expression of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic ⁇ cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in ⁇ cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia in ob/ob mice.
  • GLP-1R glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor
  • Fex analogs including, but not limted to, Fex-D, are more effective at glucose lowering than Fex.
  • the beneficial systemic efficacy achieved with Fex and Fex-D suggests intestinal FXR agonist therapy as an approach in the treatment of LADA.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists (such as two or more, three or more, four or more, or five or more of the disclosed FXR agonists, such as 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the disclosed FXR agonists) is used in the treatment or prevention of LADA in subjects (for a review see Pipi et ah, World J. Diabetes, 5:505-10, 2014, herein incorporated by reference).
  • one or more of the FXR agonists disclosed herein is administered to a gastrointestinal (GI) tract of the subject to activate FXR receptors in the intestines, and thereby treat or prevent LADA in the subject.
  • the FXR agonist(s) is administered to, without limitation, the mouth (such as by injection or by ingestion by the subject), the esophagus, the stomach or the intestines
  • orally delivered FXR agonists are ineffectively absorbed, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation.
  • FXR activation is completely limited to the intestine.
  • administration of one or more FXR agonists does not result in significant activation in the liver or kidney.
  • some measurable extra-intestinal FXR activation occurs, however the FXR activation is considerably greater in the intestines than in other locations in the body, such as in the liver or kidney.
  • the FXR agonist is minimally absorbed.
  • the FXR agonist is directly administered to the intestines (such as to the distal ileum) of an individual in need thereof.
  • the FXR agonist is directly administered to the colon or the rectum (e.g., using a suppository) of an individual in need thereof.
  • the FXR agonist is administered orally, and less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, less than 9%, less than 8%, less than 7%, less than 6%, less than 5%, less than 4%, less than 3%, less than 2%, or less than 1% of the FXR agonist is systemically absorbed.
  • systemic absorbion can be measured by determining serum levels of the FXR agonist following its admisntiration, such as at least 30 minutes, at least 1 hour, at least 1.5 hours, at least 2 hours, at least 4 hours, or at least 8 hours following its administration.
  • the serum concentration of the FXR agonist in the subject remains below the compound's EC 50 following administration (such as a level at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or even at least 50% below the compound's EC 50 ).
  • the method is a method of treating a subject having LADA.
  • Patients with LADA can have hyperglycemia in the context of insulin resistance, but also have some of the immunological and clinical features of insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, such as no insulin due to breakdown of pancreatic islet cells.
  • changes in lifestyle e.g., maintaining a healthy weight, exercising, eating sensibly
  • GSIS glucose-stimulated insulin secretion
  • the subject to be treated has a body mass index (BMI) of 25 of higher
  • a fasting blood glucose of 126 mg/dl or greater (e.g., is hyperglycemic)
  • has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells produces no insulin
  • have persistent islet cell antibodies have high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity
  • have DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes show progressive loss of beta cells, adult disease onset, defective glycaemic control, without tendency to ketoacidosis, have low levels of C-peptide, or combinations thereof.
  • the subject to be treated has a BMI of 30 of higher, 35 or higher, or 40 or higher, such as 25-29, 30-34, 35-39, or 40 or more.
  • the subject to be treated has a normal BMI, such as 16.5 -18.5 or 18.5 to 25.
  • the subject to be treated has a fasting blood glucose of at least 150 mg/dl, at least 300 mg/dl, or even at least 500 mg/dl.
  • the subject to be treated has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells, such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient (for example as determined by measuring C-peptide or insulin levels).
  • a non-diabetic patient for example as determined by measuring C-peptide or insulin levels.
  • the subject to be treated produces no detectable insulin (e.g., serum insulin).
  • the subject to be treated has persistent islet cell antibodies, such as islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment), anti-insulin antibodies
  • ICA islet cell antibodies
  • GAD A glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies
  • IA-2 insulinoma-associated autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment)
  • anti-insulin antibodies such as islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment), anti-insulin antibodies
  • Glutamic acid decarboxylase is a GABA-synthesizing enzyme that has two forms in humans, GAD65 and GAD67.
  • Anti-GAD65 autoantibodies are the most typical connected with ICA reactivity.
  • a patient with LAD A has GAD antibody positivity (> 5 RU).
  • the subject to be treated has a high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity.
  • the subject to be treated has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes.
  • the subject to be treated shows progressive loss of beta cells.
  • the subject to be treated has adult-onset diabetes (e.g., > 35 years). In some examples, the subject to be treated defective glycaemic control. In some examples, the subject to be treated does not have a tendency to develop ketoacidosis. In some examples, the subject to be treated has low levels of C-peptide. In some examples, the subject to be treated displays, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters.
  • the method is a method of preventing a subject having type II diabetes from developing LAD A, such as a subject having type II diabetes but at risk to develop LAD A.
  • a patient is determined to be at risk of developing LADA by measuring or detecting antibodies, such as anti-GAD, anti-IA2, and/or anti-insulin.
  • the disclosed methods provide a preventative/protective option for such patients, as the methods can protect pancreatic ⁇ -cells from destruction.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a BMI of 30 of higher, 35 or higher, or 40 or higher, such as 25-29, 30-34, 35-39, or 40 or more.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a normal BMI, such as 16.5 -18.5 or 18.5 to 25.
  • the subject to be treated has a fasting blood glucose of at least 150 mg/dl, at least 300 mg/dl, or even at least 500 mg/dl.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells, such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient (for example a determined by measuring C-peptide and/or insulin levels).
  • a non-diabetic e.g., healthy
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA produces reduced levels of detectable insulin (e.g., serum insulin), such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient.
  • detectable insulin e.g., serum insulin
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA is insulin resistant.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has persistent islet cell antibodies, such as islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment), anti-insulin antibodies (IAA), and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8).
  • Glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD) is a GABA-synthesizing enzyme that has two forms in humans, GAD65 and GAD67.
  • Anti-GAD65 autoantibodies are the most typical connected with ICA reactivity.
  • a patient with LADA has GAD antibody positivity (> 5 RU).
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA shows progressive loss of beta cell.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has adult-onset diabetes (e.g., > 35 years).
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has defective glycaemic control.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA does not have a tendency to develop ketoacidosis.
  • the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has low levels of C-peptide.
  • the subject to be treated displays, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters.
  • administration of one or more FXR agonists restores pancreatic ⁇ cell functions with enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in a subject, for example, without significant body weight changes (e.g., no more than a 10% increase or no more than a 5% increase in body weight).
  • GSIS glucose-stimulated insulin secretion
  • such methods increase GSIS in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • Methods of measuring GSIS are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • GLP-1 is an incretin derived from the transcription product of the pro glucagon gene.
  • the major source of GLP-1 in the body is the intestinal L cell that secretes GLP-1 as a gut hormone.
  • the biologically active forms of GLP-1 include GLP-1 -(7- 37) and GLP-1 -(7-36)NH 2 (HAEGTFTSDVSSYLEGQAAKEFIAWLVKGR; SEQ ID NO: 1) in humans, which result from selective cleavage of the proglucagon molecule.
  • GLP-2 is a 33 amino acid peptide (HADGSFSDEMNTILDNLAARDFINWLIQTKITD; SEQ ID NO: 2) in humans. GLP-2 is created by specific post-translational proteolytic cleavage of proglucagon in a process that also liberates GLP-1. GLP agonists are "incretin mimetics" that can be used to treat type 2 diabetes. Examples include, but are not limited to: exenatide (Byetta/Bydureon), liraglutide (Victoza), lixisenatide (Lyxumia), and albiglutide (Tanzeum). In certain aspects of exenatide (Byetta/Bydureon), liraglutide (Victoza), lixisenatide (Lyxumia), and albiglutide (Tanzeum). In certain
  • the FXR agonist enhances the secretion of glucagon-like peptide- 1 (GLP-1) and/or glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2).
  • GLP-1 secretion increases GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • Methods of measuring GLP-1 secretion are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • administration of one or more FXR agonists increases the respiratory capacity (e.g., mitochondrial bioenergetics) in an intestinal L cell.
  • respiratory capacity e.g., mitochondrial bioenergetics
  • such methods increase respiratory capacity in an intestinal L cell by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a cell not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • the disclosed methods in some examples increase gene expression of glucagon-like peptide- 1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic ⁇ cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in ⁇ cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia.
  • GLP-1R glucagon-like peptide- 1 receptor
  • such methods increase GLP-1R in pancreatic ⁇ cells in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • Methods of measuring gene expression are known (e.g., detection of GLP-1R proteins and/or nucleic acids), and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum insulin in the subject. Serum levels of insulin are decreased when blood glucose levels are lowered and insulin sensitivity is also increased. Thus, in some examples, the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum insulin in a subject (such as a human). In some examples, such methods decrease serum insulin in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring serum insulin are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum glucose in the subject.
  • the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum glucose in a subject (such as a human).
  • such methods decrease serum glucose in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • Methods of measuring serum glucose are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • the disclosed methods in some examples decrease the amount of one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage, such as thioredoxin-interacting protein (Txnip) and inflammatory markers usch as interleukin 1, in the subject.
  • Txnip is a marker of pancreatic beta cell damage (OMEVI 606599), and sequences are publicly available (e.g., GenBank Accession Nos.
  • the disclosed methods decrease the amount of one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage (e.g., Txnip) in a subject (such as a human).
  • a subject such as a human
  • such methods decrease one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage, such as Txnip, in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies.
  • Methods of measuring such proteins are known (e.g., at the protein or nucleic acid level), and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • one or more FXR agonists are co-administered with one or more additional compounds or therapies, for treatment or prevention of a metabolic disorder.
  • one or more FXR agonists can be administered with an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, a GLP agonist, a DPP-4 inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), a catecholamine (such as epinephrine, norepinephrine, or dopamine), peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglit
  • TGD
  • one or more FXR agonists can be administered with a statin, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, fish oil, fibrate, niacin or other treatment for dyslipidemia.
  • the one or more FXR agonists can be administered with nicotinamide ribonucleoside and analogs thereof that promote NAD+ production of which is a substrate for many enzymatic reactions such as p450s which are a target of FXR (for examples see Yang et ah, J. Med. Chem., 50:6458-61, 2007, herein incorporated by reference).
  • the method also includes performing clinical assays on the subject to be administered the one or more FXR agonists.
  • the method can also include determining if the subject produces insulin (for example by measuring serum insulin);
  • ICA islet cell antibodies
  • GAD A glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies
  • IA-2 insulinoma-associated autoantibodies
  • IAA anti-insulin antibodies
  • ZnT8 zinc transporter autoantibodies
  • measuring/detecting functional pancreatic beta cells e.g., measured by detecting C-peptide
  • measuring/detecting frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity determining if the subject has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes
  • determining if the subject has a tendency to ketoacidosis are routine, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
  • methods of detecting antibodies and proteins are routine, such as immunoassay, such as ELISA or RIA, microscopy, spectroscopy, and the like.
  • immunoassay such as ELISA or RIA
  • microscopy spectroscopy, and the like.
  • at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters are measured.
  • the method includes selecting a subject having or at risk for developing LADA for administration of one or more FXR agonists.
  • the particular mode of administration and the dosage regimen can be selected by the attending clinician, taking into account the particulars of the case (e.g. the subject, the disease, the disease state involved, the particular treatment, and whether the treatment is prophylactic).
  • Treatment can involve daily or multi-daily or less than daily (such as weekly or monthly etc.) doses over a period of a few days to months, or even years.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists can be administered in a single dose, twice daily, weekly, or in several doses, for example daily, or during a course of treatment.
  • treatment involves once daily dose or twice daily dose.
  • one or more FXR agonists are administered orally. In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered as an ileal-pH sensitive release formulation that delivers the compound to the intestines, such as to the ileum of an individual. In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered as an enterically coated formulation. In some embodiments, oral delivery of one or more FXR agonists provided herein can include formulations, as are well known in the art, to provide prolonged or sustained delivery of the drug to the gastrointestinal tract by any number of mechanisms.
  • enteric-coated and enteric-coated controlled release formulations are within the scope of the present disclosure.
  • Suitable enteric coatings include cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinylacetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate and anionic polymers of methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid methyl ester.
  • one or more FXR agonists are administered before ingestion of food, such as at least 10 minutes, at least 15 minutes, at least 20 minutes, or at least 30 minutes before ingestion of food (such as 10-60 minutes or 10-30 minutes before ingesting food). In some embodiments of the methods described herein, one or more FXR agonists are administered less than about 60 minutes before ingestion of food. In some embodiments of the methods described above, one or more FXR agonists are administered less than about 30 minutes before ingestion of food. In some embodiments of the methods described herein, one or more FXR agonists are administered after ingestion of food.
  • the methods further include administration of an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha- glucosidase inhibitor, a GLP agonist, a DPP-4 inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), a catecholamine (such as epinephrine, norepinephrine, or dopamine), peroxisome proliferator- activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglitazone, rivoglitazone, or troglitazone], aleglitazar, farglitazar, muraglitazar, or
  • tesaglitazar a TGR5 agonist, a biguanide, or a combination thereof.
  • a FXR agonist containing composition administered can include at least one of a spreading agent or a wetting agent.
  • the absorption inhibitor is a mucoadhesive agent (e.g., a mucoadhesive polymer).
  • the mucoadhesive agent is selected from methyl cellulose, polycarbophil, polyvinylpyrrolidone, sodium
  • a pharmaceutical composition administered further includes an enteroendocrine peptide and/or an agent that enhances secretion or activity of an enteroendocrine peptide.
  • compositions that comprise one or more compounds disclosed herein can be formulated in unit dosage form, suitable for individual administration of precise dosages.
  • a unit dosage contains from about 1 mg to about 50 g of one or more compounds disclosed herein, such as about 10 mg to about 10 g, about 100 mg to about 10 g, about 100 mg to about 1 g, about 500 mg to about 5 g, or about 500 mg to about 1 g.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds disclosed herein is from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, for example, about 0.5 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 250 mg/kg, or about 50 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, such as at least 1 mg/kg, at least 10 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/kg, at least 50 mg/kg, or at least 100 mg/kg.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds disclosed herein is from about 50 mg/kg to about 250 mg/kg, for example about 100 mg/kg.
  • the FXR agonist is effective faster and/or at a lower dose than Fex.
  • Fex-D is effective at lowering blood glucose with half the dose in half the time (50 mg/kg for 2 weeks), as compared to Fex (100 mg/kg for 4 weeks).
  • the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% less, at least 30%, less, at least 40% less, or at least 50% less than Fex.
  • the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% faster, at least 30%, faster, at least 40% faster, or at least 50% faster than Fex.
  • the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% faster, at least 30%, faster, at least 40% faster, or at least 50% faster than Fex and is effective at a dose at least 20% less, at least 30%, less, at least 40% less, or at least 50% less than Fex.
  • Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were purchased from Jackson laboratory (stock no. 000632). Each mouse consumed 100 mg per kg of body weight Fex (in corn oil) per day by oral gavage for 5 weeks. For in vivo analog study, each mouse consumed 50mg per kg of body weight Fex-D (in corn oil) per day by oral gavage for 14 days. For GLP-1 receptor antagonist study, each mouse was daily treated with 100 ⁇ g per kg of body weight Exendin 9-39 amide (Abeam) via intraperitoneal injection for 2 weeks. For INT- 777 study, each mouse was daily gavaged with 60 mg per kg of body weight ⁇ -777 (in corn oil) for 5 weeks.
  • FGF15 study each mouse was daily treated with 0.25 mg per kg of body weight FGF15 (in PBS with 0.1% BSA) via intravenous injection for 2 weeks.
  • the sample sizes for all animal studies are indicated in each figure legend. All mice were housed in a specific pathogen-free facility with a 12-h light, 12-h dark cycle and given free access to food and water. All in vivo data were retrieved from 3 independent experimental animal cohorts. Core body temperature was measured with a clinical rectal thermometer (Thermalert model TH-5; Physitemp). For GTTs, 6-h fasted mice received 2 g of glucose per kg of body weight by oral gavage. Human insulin (Humilin, Eli Lilly) was used for insulin sensitivity test.
  • Tail blood was drawn at indicated time intervals, and blood glucose level was measured with a One Touch Ultra glucometer (LifeScan).
  • Body composition was measured with Echo MRI-100 body composition analyzer (Echo Medical Systems). All mice were randomly assigned to experimental groups for further analysis. No samples were excluded from the analysis.
  • C0 2 production, 0 2 consumption, RQ (relative rates of carbohydrate versus fat oxidation) and ambulatory counts were determined for 4 consecutive days and nights, with at least 24-h for adaptation before data recording.
  • Mouse pancreatic islets were isolated from ob/ob mice according to a method used for rats traditionally. Briefly, 0.5 mg/ml collagenase P (Roche) diluted in HBSS buffer was injected through the common bile duct and the perfused pancreas was dissected and incubated in water bath with 37°C for 21 minutes. Digested exocrine cells and intact islets were separated using Histopaque-1077 (SIGMA) with centrifugation by 900g for 15 minutes and intact islets were picked up manually.
  • SIGMA Histopaque-1077
  • Insulin secretion assay primary mouse pancreatic islet and human islets
  • Insulin release from intact islets was monitored using batch incubation methods.
  • Isolated pancreatic islets were cultured over-night with RPMI1940 supplemented with 10% (v/v) fetal bovine serum and 1% (v/v) Antibiotics-antimycotic solution, were pre-cultured at 37°C for 30 minutes in Krebs Ringer bicarbonate buffer (KRBH) containing 129.4 mM NaCl, 3.7 mM KCl, 2.7 mM CaCl 2 , 1.3 mM KH 2 P0 4 , 1.3 mM MgS0 4 , 24.8 mM NaHC0 3 (equilibrated with 5 % C0 2 , 95 % 0 2 , pH7.4), lOmM HEPES and 0.2 % (v/v) BSA (fraction V) with 3mM glucose.
  • KRBH Krebs Ringer bicarbonate buffer
  • pancreatic islets were incubated for 30 minutes KRBH buffer (500 ⁇ 1/10 islets) with 3 mM or 20 mM glucose with or without 100 nM Exendin-4 to determine insulin secretion levels. At the end of the incubation period, islets were pelleted by centrifugation, and aliquots of the buffer were sampled. The amounts of insulin were determined by Rat/mouse Insulin ELISA KIT (Millipore) for mice islets.
  • GLP-1 was measured with a commercial kit (EZGLP1T-36K, Millipore). For in vivo GLP-1 secretion, each animal was gavaged with 25 mg per kg of body weight sitagliptin 60-minutes before glucose load. Blood was collected from the tail vein at the indicated intervals, and transferred to serum collection tubes containing sitagliptin.
  • NCI-H716 cells were seeded in XF 96- well cell culture microplates (Seahorse Bioscience) at 6.0 x 10 4 cells per well in 150 ⁇ of growth medium and then incubated at 37°C/5% C0 2 for 24 hr.
  • a Seahorse Bioscience instrument model XF96 was used to measure the rate of change of dissolved oxygen in the media surrounding the cells. All procedures followed manufacturer's instructions.
  • RNA was isolated from cell pellets treated with RNAlater using the RNA mini kit
  • Sequencing libraries were prepared from 100-500ng total RNA using the TruSeq RNA Sample Preparation Kit v2 (Illumina) according to the manufacturer's protocol. Briefly, mRNA was purified, fragmented, and used for first-, then second-strand cDNA synthesis followed by adenylation of 3' ends. Samples were ligated to unique adapters and subjected to PCR amplification.
  • RNA-Seq libraries prepared from two biological replicates for each experimental condition were sequenced on the Illumina HiSeq 2500 using bar-coded
  • Image analysis and base calling were performed with Illumina CASAVA-1.8.2. This yielded a median of 29.9M usable reads per sample. Short read sequences were mapped to a
  • UCSC mm9 reference sequence using the RNA-seq aligner STAR.
  • Known splice junctions from mm9 were supplied to the aligner and de novo junction discovery was also
  • RNA-Seq results for genes of interest were also explored visually using the UCSC Genome Browser.
  • Fex-treated ob/ob mice did not exhibit any changes of body weight gain (FIG. 2A) or lean/fat mass (FIG. 2B). While no difference was observed in the tissue weights of liver and inguinal fat (iWAT), gonadal fat (gWAT) was modestly but significantly reduced by Fex treatment (FIG. 2C). Consistent with reduced adiposity, the gene expression of inflammatory cytokines and chemokines were decreased in gWAT (FIG. 3 A and 3B).
  • Fex treatment changed the relative proportions of immune cells in adipose tissues, most notably increasing the proportion of M2 macrophages in gWAT, indicating that Fex treatment suppressed inflammation in visceral adipose tissues (FIGS. 3A-3C).
  • Fex-treated mice exhibited significant improvements in their endocrine and metabolic profiles including reduced glucose and insulin levels (FIG. 2D and 2E). Furthermore, Fex treatment improved glucose tolerance and insulin sensitivity in ob/ob mice (FIGS. 2F and 2G). Transcriptomic analysis from skeletal muscle showed that gene involved in insulin signaling and mitochondrion were largely increased (FIGS. 4A-4D) whereas hepatic gluconeogenesis/lipogenesis were remarkably suppressed by Fex treatment (FIG. 2H and FIGS. 5A-5C). Notably, Fex-treated mice exhibited increased respiratory exchange ratio in the dark period (FIGS. 6A-6D).
  • Fex potentiates bioenergetics in enteroendocrinal L cells
  • mice were challenged with a DPP4 inhibitor, sitagliptin (25mg/kg) prior to a glucose challenge.
  • Fex-treated ob/ob mice displayed an increase of plasma GLP-1 level 20 minutes after the glucose challege, and improved glucose tolerance (FIGS. 7F and 7G).
  • Fex restores pancreatic ⁇ cell functions to secrete insulin
  • Insulin resistance can be associated with reduced ⁇ cell insulin secretion in response to glucose, while GLP-1 augments glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS).
  • GSIS glucose-stimulated insulin secretion
  • serum insulin levels were determined after a glucose challenge in ob/ob mice. A significant increase in serum insulin was observed in Fex-treated ob/ob mice (FIG. 10A). In addition, the insulin content was significantly higher in ex vivo islets from Fex-treated mice (FIG. 10B). Furthermore, ex vivo insulin secretion was dramatically increased in response to 20 mM glucose (FIG. 10D). The presence of a GLP-1 agonist,
  • Exendin-4 (Ex-4) further potentiated insulin secretion (FIG. 10D), indicating that Fex is sufficient to enhance GSIS in pancreatic ⁇ cells from diabetic mice. Consistent with the higher insulin content, histological analysis showed that islet are larger in Fex-treated ob/ob mice (FIG. 10D). A comparison of the transcriptional changes clearly showed that Fex increased gene expressions involved in cAMP signaling/insulin secretion and wound healing pathway whereas it suppressed expression of genes involved in the apoptotic pathway, indicating that Fex improves pancreatic ⁇ cell physiology in ob/ob mice (FIG. 10E).
  • Fex-D a selective deuteration proposed to reduce degradation by endogenous cytochrome P450 enzymes (FIG. 12A).
  • Fex and Fex-D exhibited similar low in vitro permeability in human intestinal epithelial Caco2 cells during a 2 hour incubation. (Table 1).
  • Table 1 FEX analogues show low permeability in intestinal epithelial cells
  • An efflux ratio >2 indicates potential for the compound to be a substrate for Pgp or other active transporter.
  • Fex-D significantly induced FXR target genes in intestine but not in the liver, consistent with it retaining intestinally-restricted activity.
  • Fex 100 mg/kg/day
  • Fex-D at a reduced 50 mg/kg/day dose
  • FIG. 12B Neither Fex nor Fex-D treatment led to any changes in body weight compared to vehicle treatment (FIG. 13 A). While the reduced Fex treatment duration (2 weeks) had little effect, Fex-D treatment significantly reduced fasting glucose levels (FIG. 12C), and was accompanied by increased thermogenesis (FIG. 13B).
  • Fex- D treated mice displayed dramatically improved glucose homeostasis, as seen in their glucose tolerance tests and in their reduced fasting insulin levels (FIGS. 12D and 12E). Furthermore, insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge was significantly improved over Fex treatment (FIG. 12E), indicating that Fex-D is efficient in potentiating beneficial effects at a low dosage. Consistent with Fex-D treatment potentiated the metabolic capacity of enteroendocnnal L cells compared to Fex, Fex-D treatment enhanced GLP-1 secretion in ob/ob mice in response to glucose (FIG. 12F and FIG. 13C).
  • enteroendocrinal L cells in response to glucose, leading to physiological improvements in pancreatic ⁇ cells and enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion.
  • Fex potentiates the bioenergetics of enteroendocrinal L cells to increase GLP-1 secretion.
  • Fex-D also exhibits similar physiological benefits, including enhanced GLP-1 secretion, indicating that intestinal FXR agonism potentiates bioenergetics to stimulate incretin secretion in enteroendocrinal L cells to ameliorate systemic glucose homeostasis.
  • FGF15 has been shown to increase metabolic rate and improve glucose and lipid homeostasis without changes in food intake.
  • FGF15 treatment significantly reduced blood glucose levels as well as glucose sensitivity (as measured by glucose tolerance tests) without affecting glucose uptake in the skeletal muscle (FIGS. 16A- 16D).
  • Transcriptomic analyses of islets from vehicle- or FGF15-treated ob/ob mice establishes that FGF15 participates, at least partially, in the Fex-mediated improvements of pancreatic ⁇ cells in ob/ob mice (FIGS. 17A-17F).
  • GLP-1 Glucagon- like peptide 1
  • intestinal L cells a gut-derived peptide secreted by intestinal L cells after a meal, where it functions to potentiate glucose-stimulated insulin secretion, enhance ⁇ -cell growth and survival, and inhibit gastric emptying and food intake.
  • the demonstrated glucose- lowering effects of GLP-1 have lead to the approval of GLP-1 receptor agonists for the treatment of Type 2 diabetes.
  • GLP-1 secretion is reduced in patients with type 2 diabetes, leading to interest in GLP-1 secretagogues as alternative therapies.
  • fexaramine and the deuterated analogs induce a common set of genes in islets that are involved in intracellular signaling, insulin secretion, and regulation of exocytosis.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are embodiments of a method of treating or preventing latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA) in a subject. Such embodiments include administering to a subject (e.g., via the gastrointestinal tract) a therapeutically effective amount of one or farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonist compounds, thereby activating FXR receptors in the intestines, and treating or preventing latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA) in the subject.

Description

INTESTINAL FXR AGONISM ENHANCES GLP-1 SIGNALING TO RESTORE
PANCREATIC BETA CELL FUNCTIONS
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/133,042, filed on
March 13, 2015, which is herein incoprated by reference in its entirety.
FIELD
This disclosure concerns methods for using farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists to treat or prevent latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LAD A).
ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF GOVERNMENT SUPPORT
This invention was made with government support under Grant No. R24-DK090962 awarded by the National Institute of Health (ΝΓΗ). The government has certain rights in the invention.
BACKGROUND
Type II diabetes (T2D) is characterized by progressive failure of pancreatic β cell function and the glucagon-like peptide- 1 (GLP1) signaling targeted drugs such as GLP1 analogues and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 (DPP-4) inhibitors are widely used for treatment of T2D. Evidence has shown that lipids, especially saturated fatty acids, accumulate in β cells to induce β cell dysfunction and lipotoxic apoptosis. GLPs and glucagon are hormones encoded by the same gene, pro glucagon, each having different physiological activities. Due to alternative processing by prohormone convertases, glucagon is predominantly produced in endocrine pancreatic a cells whereas GLPs are predominantly produced in the intestine. GLP-1 is primarily produced in L cells during the postprandial state to promote insulin secretion in pancreatic β cells to reduce blood glucose levels. Administration of a GLP-1 antagonist leads to increased blood glucose levels in humans, whereas disruption of the GLP-1 receptor gene results in glucose intolerance in a rodent model. Treatment of diabetic patients with GLP-1 or GLP-1 analogues increases meal- stimulated insulin secretion and suppresses postprandial
hyperglycemia without causing hypoglycemia. Thus, approaches to increase endogenous GLP-1 levels through modulation of GLP-1 secretion from enteroendocrine L cells would be a potential therapeutic intervention to treat or prevent LADA. Fexaramine (Fex) is a non-systemic FXR agonist that mimics food activation of intestinal FXR, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation. Fex or FXR agonist treatment produces a novel means to treat or prevent LADA.
SUMMARY
It is shown herein that intestinally-restricted FXR activation enhances GLP-1 secretion of enteroendocrine L cells, which contributes to the improvement of glucose tolerance in diabetic rodent models. The data demonstrate that Fex increases mitochondrial activities to enhance GLP-1 secretion in L cells, leading to improved pancreatic β cell physiology.
Concomitantly, Fex also increases expression of GLP-1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic β cells to enhance glucose-stimulated insulin secretion. Furthermore, a structurally modified Fex analog, Fex-D remarkably improved metabolic parameters with relatively low dosage. The beneficial efficacy achieved with Fex and its analog, Fex-D, indicates that intestinal FXR activation is a safer approach in the treatment or prevention of latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA). In some embodiments, intestinal FXR activation is used in the treatment or prevention of latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LADA). In some embodiments, intestinal FXR activation is accomplished by administering at least one FXR agonist to the adult with LADA. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is a FXR agonist as described herein. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is administered to an adult with LADA at a dose that results in a systemic level of the FXR agonist below the EC50 for the FXR agonist (e.g., such that there is minimal activation outside the intestines). In one example, the FXR agonist is administered to an adult with LADA at a dose that results in less than 30 nM of the FXR agonist in the serum 1 hour following the administration.
In some cases, patients with LADA, sometimes referred to as type 1.5 diabetes, exhibit typical noninsulin-dependent diabetes mellitus symptoms (NIDDM, e.g., hyperglycemia in the context of insulin resistance and relative lack of insulin), but patients also have some of the immunological and clinical features of insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus (IDDM, e.g., no insulin due to breakdown of islet cells in the pancreas). Thus, changes in lifestyle (e.g., maintaining a healthy weight, exercising, eating sensibly) are not effective for such patients. The diagnosis of LADA can be based on a high blood sugar in combination with the clinical impression that islet failure rather than insulin resistance is the main cause. In some examples, such patients may have a low C-peptide levels and antibodies against the islets of Langerhans, islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma- associated (IA-2) autoantibodies, and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8).
Provided herein are methods for treating or preventing LAD A in a subject, such as a mammal. In some examples, such subjects have a fasting blood glucose level of 126 mg/dl or more (e.g., are hyperglycemic), are not overweight (e.g., normal weight or have a body mass index of 18.5 to 25 or 16 to 18.5) or are overweight or are obese (e.g., have a body mass index of at least 25, at least 30, at least 35 or at least 40, such as 29-29, 30-34, or 35-40, or greater than 40), are insulin-resistant or produce no insulin, have persistent islet cell antibodies, have high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity, have DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes, show progressive loss of beta cells, adult disease onset, defective glycaemic control, without tendency to ketoacidosis, have low levels of C-peptide, or combinations thereof. In some examples, such methods include administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of one or more farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists (such as, but not limited to, deuterated Fex or a Fex analog) (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 of such compounds). Fex and its analogs are substantially absorbed in the gastrointestinal tract, thereby activating FXR receptors in the intestines to treat or prevent LADA in the subject. In some examples, absorption of the compounds is substantially limited to the intestines. In other examples, the FXR agonist substantially enhances FXR target gene expression in the intestines while not substantially enhancing FXR target gene expression in the liver or kidney.
In some embodiments, administration of one or more farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists results in no substantial change in food intake and/or fat consumption in the subject, and/or no substantial change in appetite in the subject. In some examples, administering one or more FXR agonists can also restore pancreatic beta cell function, increase glucose stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) without significantly changing body weight, increase GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells, increase expression of GLP-1R in pancreatic beta cells, or combinations thereof, for example as compared to no administration of one or more FXR agonists. Thus in some embodiments, the methods improve glucose homeostasis in the subject.
In some embodiments, the method further includes administering to the subject an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, an amylin agonist, a dipeptidyl-peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitor, a glucagon-like peptide (GLP) agonist, meglitinide, sulfonylurea, a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist, or combinations thereof. Exemplary Farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonist compounds, and compositions comprising such compounds, that target intestinal FXR that can be used in the disclosed method embodiments are provided. Certain exemplary compounds have the following general formula
Figure imgf000005_0001
aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; La and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi- bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;n is 0 or 1; and X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl.
Also with reference to this general formula, any or all of the following provisos may apply:
if W is c and Ld are both H, then X is not a benzopyran;
if R is
Figure imgf000005_0002
, Lc and Ld are both H, and La and Lb are both H or together form a bond, then X is not a benzopyran;
X is not substituted with -R^IZ-R*2, where
Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S;
Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5;
Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7;
Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl;
Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere;
I/2 is a bond or NRx3;
Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, - S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and
each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; and
if R is
Figure imgf000006_0001
, Y is CH, Rc, Rd, Re and Rfa are all hydrogen, and La and Lb are both H or together form a pi-bond, then
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rb is methyl, and R^ is H then X is not phenyl, 4-biphenyl,
4-bromophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3,5- dimethoxyphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-(3,4-difluorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- acetylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methylthiophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-tert- butylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-ethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-chlorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- methylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2-methoxy-5-chlorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- chloro-4-fluorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3 - trifluoromethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-
Figure imgf000006_0002
Figure imgf000007_0001
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rft is H and X is then R is not methyl, ethyl or tert-butyl;
if Rb is methyl, Rfc is H and X is
Figure imgf000007_0002
then Ra is not cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl;
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rft is H and X is
Figure imgf000007_0003
then Rb is not methyl or tert-butyl;
Figure imgf000007_0004
not hydroxyl, (trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl-O, methoxy, O-benzyl, OCH2C02Et, OC(0)CH3, OC(0)Ph or OS02CH3; and if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rb is methyl, Rfc is H and X is
Figure imgf000008_0001
then Rh is not - CH=CHC(0)OMe, -CH=CHC(0)OEt, -CH=CHC(0)NMe2, -CH=CHC(0)NHlBu, - CH=CHC(0)OtBu, -CH=CHC(0)OiPr, -CH=CHC(0)OCH2Ph, -CH=CHC(0)OH, - CH=CHCH2OMe, -CH=CHCH2OEt or -CH=CHCH2OPh.
In some embodiments, the compounds Lc and Ld are both H, and La and Lb together form a pi-bond.
Certain other disclosed compounds have the following general formula
Figure imgf000008_0002
With reference to this general formula, R1 is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or polycyclic; R2 is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is selected from N, N-0 or C-R3d; R3a, R3b, R3c and R3d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; R4a and R4b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; L1 and L2 are independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; and R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d and R5e are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl or nitro; or any two adjacent groups selected together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; and none of R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d or R5e is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or - C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; R"2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, - C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl. For certain embodiments where L1 and L2 are both hydrogen or together form a pi-bond, Y is N or C-halogen; or R1 is polycyclic; or R4 is D, or R5a is F, CI or I; or R5d and R5e together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; or R5b and R5c together form an aryl, cycloalkyl, nitrogen- containing heterocyclic or nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring; or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, Y is C-R3d, and R3d or R5a or both are halogen, and in certain examples the halogen is fluorine. In other embodiments, Y is N.
Figure imgf000009_0001
examples, the polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], 3.3.2], [3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl. In certain working embodiments, the polycyclic is
Figure imgf000009_0002
In some embodiments, R5c is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring, and the compound has a formula
Figure imgf000009_0003
where Z is selected from N, CH, or C-alkyl; R6a, R6c, R6d and R6g each is independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl; and R6h is selected from H, D, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl. In some examples, Z is N, and/or R6a, R6c, R6d and R6g are all H. In particular embodiments, R6h is methyl.
In other embodiments, R5c comprises phenyl, leading to compounds having a formula
Figure imgf000010_0001
where R , R , R6c and R6 each is independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl; G is a lone pair of electrons, or an oxygen; R6e and R6f each is independently selected from alkyl, H or cycloalkyl; and
where R3d or R5a or both are halogen, or R4 is D, or R1 is polycyclic, or any combination thereof. In some examples, R6e and R6f are both methyl.
In any of the above embodiments, R4 may be deuterium, and/or R2 may be methyl. In certain embodiments, R1 is cyclohexyl.
In particular embodiments, the compound is selected from
Figure imgf000010_0002
Another disclosed embodiment concerns com ounds having a formula
Figure imgf000011_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, N-oxide or solvate thereof. With reference to this formula: R!-R15 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R16 is selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; Ra and Rb are independently hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic or D-aliphatic, or together form a bond, such as a pi-bond; and if Ra and Rb together form a pi-bond then at least one of R!-R16 is or comprises deuterium.
In some embodiments, disclosed compounds have a formula
Figure imgf000011_0002
In other embodiments, disclosed compounds have a formula
Figure imgf000011_0003
and at least one of R!-R16 is or comprises deuterium.
In certain disclosed embodiments, R7 is alkyl or deuterated alkyl, such as isopropyl or a deuterated isopropyl group comprising from 1 to 7 deuterium atoms. In certain embodiments, at least one of R!-R5 is a halogen, such as fluoro. For certain embodiments, R16 is hydrogen. In other disclosed embodiments, R10 and R11 independently are alkyl or deuterated alkyl, such as methyl or deuterated methyl, wherein the deuterated alkyl group comprises from 1 to n halogen
Figure imgf000012_0001
11
Figure imgf000013_0001
Another embodiment concerns compounds having a formula
Figure imgf000013_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, N-oxide, or solvate thereof. With reference to this formula: R21-R34 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CX3, where X is a halogen, such as fluorine, with CF3 being a particular example, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R35 is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D- heteroaliphatic; R36 is hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; X is N or CR37; and R37 is hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; where if X is N, then at least one of R21-R36 is or comprises deuterium. In some embodiments, disclosed compounds have a formula
Figure imgf000014_0001
other embodiments, disclosed compounds have a formula
Figure imgf000014_0002
In particular embodiments, R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, deuterated alkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl, such as cyclohexyl or deuterated cyclohexyl comprising 1 to 11 deuterium atoms. In particular embodiments, R36 is hydrogen; R34 is CF3; and R23 is halogen, such as fluorine or chlorine. Certain compounds are chiral, and all stereoisomers are included in this disclosure. For certain embodiments, the compound is the most biologically active stereoisomer, such as the /S-stereoisomer. Exemplary compounds according to this formula include
Figure imgf000015_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, N-oxide or solvate thereof, wherein: R -R 8 and R52-R55 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R49-R51 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R56 is amino, cycloamino or substituted cycloamino; Y and Z are independently N or CR57; and each R57 independently is selected from deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
In some embodiments, disclosed compounds have a formula selected from
Figure imgf000016_0001
In some embodiments, at least one of R -R is or comprises deuterium. For certain disclosed embodiments, R51 is aliphatic or D-aliphatic, such as methyl or deuterated methyl having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms. For certain disclosed embodiments, R49 and R50 independently are hydrogen or deuterium; and R41 and R45 independently are aliphatic or D-aliphatic, such as methyl or deuterated methyl having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms. For other embodiments, R56 is a cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as pyrrolidine, 2-methylpyrrolidine, morpholine, -methylpiperazine, piperidine, or azepane. Exemplary compounds having this formula include
Figure imgf000016_0002
Figure imgf000017_0001
Also, in any of the above embodiments, none of R!-R57 is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NR , sulfonyl or S; R is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and R are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, aliphatic, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, - S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, aliphatic.
Compositions comprising the disclosed compounds also are provided. In some embodiments, the composition comprises a first disclosed compound, and an additional component, such as a pharmaceutically exceptable excipient, an additional therapeutic compound, or a combination thereof. In certain examples, the additional therapeutic compound is a second disclosed compound. In some embodiments, the composition has an enteric coating.
The foregoing and other objects and features of the disclosure will become more apparent from the following detailed description, which proceeds with reference to the accompanying figures.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIGS. 1A-1D show that fexaramine (Fex) enhances thermogenesis in leptin-deficient ob/ob mice. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with Vehicle or Fexaramine
(lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Core temperature (B) QPCR of genes involved in thermogenesis in brown fat (C) Functional annotation of transcriptional altered genes (D) Heatmap showing that the expression of a large number of genes involved in oxidative phosphorylation in brown fat is increased with Fex treatment.
FIGS. 2A-2I show that Fex improves glucose homeostasis without body weight changes in leptin-deficient mice. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Body weight curve (B) Body weight composition by MRI (C) Wet weight of inguinal (iWAT), gonadal (gWAT) white adipose tissue and liver (D) Serum glucose levels after 4 hour fast (E) Insulin levels after 4 hour fast (F) Glucose tolerance test (G) Insulin tolerance test (ITT) (H) Pyruvate tolerance test (PTT) (I) Progressive blood glucose levels with Fex treatment and after withdrawal of Fex. Data represent the mean ± STD.
Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 3A-3C show that Fex increases the M2-macrophage population to suppress inflammation in adipose tissues. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in cytokine signaling in gWAT are largely reduced by Fex treatment (B) Pathway analyses of gene expression changes in gWAT (C) Macrophage profile in gWAT. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 4A-4D show that Fex enhances insulin signaling in skeletal muscles. Leptin- deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Pathway analyses of gene expression changes in skeletal muscles, including quadriceps and soleus (B) Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in mitochrodial function and insulin signaling in quadriceps are largely increased upon Fex treatment (C) Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in mitochrodial function and oxidation/reduction reactions in soleus are largely increased upon Fex treatment (D) qPCR of gene expression in quadriceps and soleus. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the
Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01
FIGS. 5A-5C show that Fex reduces gluconeogenesis/lipogenesis in the liver. Leptin- deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Pathway analyses of gene expression changes in liver (B) Heatmap depicting that the expression of gene involved in gluconeogenesis, glycogen metabolism, and the insulin signaling pathway in the liver are largely suppressed upon Fex treatment. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 6A-6D show that Fex enhances glucose metabolism in leptin-deficient mice.
Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. Mice were housed in metabolic cages and the following were measured: (A) Oxygen consumption (B) Carbon dioxide production (C) Respiratory Exchange Rate (D) Cumulative ambulatory counts. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01
FIGS. 7A-7G show that Fex enhances mitochondrial activity to increase glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) secretion in enteroendocnne L cells. (A-B) Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks (A) Gene expression profile in ileum (B) Heatmap depicting that the expression of selected gene involved in mitochrondrial metabolism are increased upon Fex treatment (C-E) Human intestinal L cells (NCI-H716) were treated with vehicle or Fex (1 μΜ) for 24 hr. (C) Real-time oxygen consumption rate in vitro (D) ATP maintenance in vehicle or Fexa- treated L cells. ATP levels were measured upon treatment with Bethanechol chloride (uncoupler) (E) Glucose stimulated GLP-1 secretion from L cells after treatment with control (DMSO), Fex, or the TGR5 ligand INT-777, normalized to 0 mM glucose (F-G) Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or fexaramine (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (F) Serum total GLP-1 levels (G) Glucose tolerance test performed after pre-treatment with the Dpp4 inhibitor, Sitagliptin (lOmg/kg). Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIG. 8 shows that functional FXR is expressed in enteroendocrinal L cells. QPCR shows that the FXR target gene SHP is induced by Fex and Fex-D treatment, but not by the TGR5 ligand INT-777. Proglucagon expression is selectively induced by INT-777, while the expression of DPP4 is not affected by either FXR or TGR5 ligands. FIGS. 9A-9B show that FEX enhances mitochondrial activity to maintain ATP levels in enteroendocrine L cells. Human intestinal L cells were treated with vehicle (DMSO), fexaramine (1 μΜ) or the FRX antagonist gugglusterone (ΙΟμΜ) for 24 hr. (A) Oxygen consumption rate (OCR) measured in a Seahorse analyzer. (B) Total GLP-1 secretion at basal condition.
FIGS. 10A-10F show that Fex restores glucose-stimulated insulin secretion in pancreatic β cells. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or Fex (100 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge. (B) Insulin content in islets (C) ex vivo glucose-stimulated insulin secretion from isolated pancreatic islets (D) Histological analysis (E) Heatmaps depicting that Fex treatment largely reduces the expression of genes involved in apoptosis, and increases the expression of genes involved in wound healing, cAMP signaling, insulin secretion, and Redox reactions in islets (F) Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with Fexaramine (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks followed by treatment with vehicle or the GLP-1 antagonist Ex-9 (100 g/kg) via LP for two weeks. Insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIG. 11 shows that FEX restores pancreatic beta cell physiology via GLP-1 signaling. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with Fex (lOOmg/kg) via P.O. for 6 weeks.
During the last 2 weeks, Fex treatment was combined with vehicle or the GLP-1 antagonist Ex-9 (100 μg/kg) via LP. Blood glucose levels during treatments. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 12A-12H show that structurally modified Fex analogues increase glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) secretion to restore glucose stimulated insulin secretion in leptin-deficient mice. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex, or the analogue Fex-D (50 mg/kg) via P.O. for 14 days (A) Chemical structures of fexaramine and Fex-D (B)
Schematic of the experimental design (C) Serum glucose levels (D) Glucose tolerance test (E) Insulin secretion in vivo (F) GLP-1 secretion in vivo (G) Heatmap showing hierarchal clustering of gene expression changes in islet induced by Fex (100 mg/kg, 4wks) and FexD (50 mg/kg, 2 weeks) treatment in ob/ob mice (in vivo); by treatment of islets with XL335 (1 μΜ), Fex (1 μΜ), mFgfl5 and hFgfl9 (24 hours ex vivo); and mFgfl5 (0.15 mg/kg, 2 weeks) and INT777 (Tgr5, 60 mg/kg, 4 weeks) treatment of ob/ob mice (in vivo). Gene expression was measured by RNA- Seq and changes are expressed as Z-score. (H) Ven diagram of changes in gene expression in pancreatic islets induced by FEX (lOOmg/kg for 5 weeks) and FEX-D (50mg/kg for 14 days). Pathway analysis of genes co-regulated by Fex and Fex-D. Heatmap comparing gene expression changes induced by Fex and Fex-D, revealing increased efficacy of Fex-D as well as altered specificity. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 13A-13D show that FEX-D enhances thermogenesis and oxygen consumption.
(A-B) Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex, or Fex analogue Fex-D (50 mg/kg) via P.O. for 14 days. (A) Body weight curves and (B) Core body temperature. (C) Oxygen consumption rate (OCR) of human intestinal L cells treated with vehicle (DMSO), Fex (1 μΜ), FEX-D (1 μΜ) or XL335 (1 μΜ) for 24 hr. (D) Gene expression changes, as measured by QPCR, in the livers of ob/ob mice treated with vehicle or Fex-D, indicating that oral Fex-D delivery does not activate FXR target genes in liver. Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 14A-14G show that Fex rescues β cells through enhanced redox and reduced apoptosis similar to TGR5 activation. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex (lOOmg/kg), or the TGR5 agonist, INT-777 (60mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Body weight curve (B) MRI Body composition (C) Blood glucose levels (D) Glucose tolerance test, GTT (E) Insulin tolerance test, ITT (F) In vivo glucose stimulated insulin secretion (G) ex vivo glucose stimulated insulin secretion from islets. Data represent the mean ± STD.
Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
Figure imgf000021_0001
INT-777
FIGS. 15A-15C show that Fex rescues β cells through enhanced redox and reduced apoptosis similar to TGR5 activation. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle, Fex (100 mg/kg), or the TGR5 agonist, INT-777 (60 mg/kg) via P.O. for 5 weeks. (A) Ven diagrams showing overlap in gene expression changes induced in islet by Fex and INT-777 treatments (B) Pathway analyses of commonly regulated genes in islets (C) Heatmap of transcriptional changes in islets indicating that Fex and INT-777 treatments induce similar changes in genes involved in different physiological processes.
FIGS. 16A-16D show the effects of the FGF15 signaling pathway on glucose homeostasis. Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were treated daily with vehicle or FGF-15
(0.15mg/kg) via LP. for 2 weeks. (A) Blood glucose levels (B) Glucose tolerance test (C)
Insulin tolerance test (D) Glucose uptake into skeletal muscle (soleus). Data represent the mean ± STD. Statistical analysis was performed with the Student's t test. *p<0.05, **p<0.01.
FIGS. 17A-17F show the transcriptional changes induced in pancreatic islets.. Ob/ob mice were treated with Fex (100 mg/kg for 5 weeks), INT-777 (60 mg/kg for 5 weeks), or FGF- 15 (0.15 mg/kg for 2 weeks). (A) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in sterol/cholesterol metabolic processes, showing similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment largely suppressed these genes. (B) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in oxidation/reduction, showing similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment largely suppressed these genes. (C) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in insulin secretion/cAMP pathway, showing similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment had a minimal effect. (D) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in inflammation and immune responses, showing largely similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment had a minimal effect. (E) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in wound healing responses, showing largely similar levels of induction by Fex, INT-777, and FGF15. (F) Heatmap of expression changes in genes involved in apoptosis, showing largely similar levels of induction by Fex and INT-777, while FGF15 treatment had a minimal effect..
FIG. 18 is a heatmap of expression changes of selected genes in pancreatic islets from ob/ob mice treated with fexaramine analogs, Fex, Fex-D, and Salkl lO, revealing similar expression changes with the three analogs.
SEQUENCE LISTING
The amino acid sequences are shown using standard three letter code for amino acids, as defined in 37 C.F.R. 1.822.
SEQ ID NO. 1 is a protein sequence of GLP-l-(7-36).
SEQ ID NO. 2 is a protein sequence of GLP-2. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
I. Terms
The following explanations of terms and methods are provided to better describe the present disclosure and to guide those of ordinary skill in the art in the practice of the present disclosure. The singular forms "a," "an," and "the" refer to one or more than one, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. For example, the term "comprising a FXR agonist" includes single or plural FXR agonists and is considered equivalent to the phrase "comprising at least one FXR agonist." The term "or" refers to a single element of stated alternative elements or a combination of two or more elements, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. As used herein, "comprises" means "includes." Thus, "comprising A or B," means "including A, B, or A and B," without excluding additional elements. Dates of GenBank® Accession Nos. referred to herein are the sequences available at least as early as March 13, 2015. All references, including patents and patent applications, and GenBank® Accession numbers cited herein are incorporated by reference.
Unless explained otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood to one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, suitable methods and materials are described below. The materials, methods, and examples are illustrative only and not intended to be limiting.
All groups herein are understood to include substituted groups unless specifically stated otherwise, or context indicates otherwise. A substituted group means that one or more hydrogen atoms of the specified group or radical is each, independently of one another, replaced with the same or different non-hydrogen substituent. Exemplary substituent groups are identified below.
Substituent groups for substituting for one or more hydrogens (any two hydrogens on a single carbon can be replaced with =0, =NR70, =N-OR70, =N2 or =S) on saturated carbon atoms in the specified group or radical are, unless otherwise specified, -R60, halo, deuterium, =0, -OR70, -SR70, - R80R80, trihalomethyl, -CN, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -N02, =N2, -N3, -S02R70, -S020" M+, -S020R70, -OS02R70, -OS020 M+, -0S020R70, -P(0)(0) 2(M+)2, -P(O)(OR70)O M+, -P(O)(OR70)2, -C(0)R70, -C(S)R70, -C(NR70)R70, -C(0)O M+, -C(0)OR70, -C(S)OR70, -C(O)NR80R80, -C(NR70)NR80R80, -OC(0)R70, -OC(S)R70, -OC(0)O M+, -OC(0)OR70, -OC(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)R70, -NR70C(S)R70, -NR70CO2-M+, -NR70CO2R70, -NR70C(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)NR80R80, -NR70C(NR70)R70 or -NR70C(NR70)NR80R80, where R60 is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which maybe optionally further substituted; each R70 is independently hydrogen or R60; each R80 is independently R70 or alternatively, two R80's, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are bonded, form a 5-, 6- or 7-membered heterocycloalkyl which may optionally include from 1 to 4 of the same or different additional heteroatoms selected from O, N or S, of which N may have -H or d-C3 alkyl substitution; and each M+ is a counter ion with a net single positive charge. Each M+ may independently be, for example, an alkali ion, such as K+, Na+, Li+; an ammonium ion, such as +N(R60)4; or an alkaline earth ion, such as [Ca2+]o.5, [Mg2+]o.5, or [Ba2+]o.5 ("subscript 0.5" means e.g. that one of the counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions can be an ionized form of a compound of the invention and the other a typical counter ion such as chloride, or two ionized compounds of the invention can serve as counter ions for such divalent alkali earth ions, or a doubly ionized compound of the invention can serve as the counter ion for such divalent alkali earth ions). As specific examples, - R80R80 is meant to include - H2, - H-alkyl, N-pyrrolidinyl, N- piperazinyl, V-methyl-piperazin-l-yl, 7V-morpholinyl and -N(alkyl)2 such as, for example, -N(methyl)2 or -N(methyl)(ethyl).
Substituent groups for hydrogens on unsaturated carbon atoms in "substituted" alkene, cycloalkene, alkyne, aryl and heteroaryl groups are, unless otherwise specified, -R60, halo, deuterium, -O M+, -OR70, -SR70, -S"M+, - R80R80, trihalomethyl, -CF3, -CN, -OCN, -SCN, -NO, -N02, -N3, -S02R70, -S03 "M+, -S03R70, -OS02R70, -OS03 M+, -OS03R70, -P03 "2(M+)2, -P(O)(OR70)O-M+, -P(O)(OR70)2, -C(0)R70, -C(S)R70, -C(NR70)R70, -C02 M+, -C02R70 -C(S)OR70, -C(O)NR80R80, -C(NR70)NR80R80, -OC(0)R70, -OC(S)R70, -OC02 M+, -OC02R70, -OC(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)R70, -NR70C(S)R70, -NR70CO2 M+, -NR70CO2R70, -NR70C(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)NR80R80, -NR70C(NR70)R70 or -NR70C(NR70)NR80R80, where R60, R70, R80 and M+ are as previously defined, provided that in case of substituted alkene or alkyne, the substituents are not -O M+, -OR70, -SR70, or -S"M+.
Substituent groups for replacing hydrogens on nitrogen atoms in "substituted" heterocyclic groups are, unless otherwise specified, -R60, -0"M+, -OR70, -SR70, -S"M+,
-NR80R80, trihalomethyl, -CF3, -CN, -NO, -N02, -S(0)2R70, -S(0)20"M+, -S(0)2OR70, -OS(0)2R70, -OS(0)2O M+, 0S(0)20R70, -Ρ(0)(0")2+)2, -P(O)(OR70)O"M+,
-P(O)(OR70)(OR70), -C(0)R70, -C(S)R70, -C(NR70)R70, -C(0)OR70, -C(S)OR70,
-C(O)NR80R80, -C(NR70)NR80R80, -OC(0)R70, -OC(S)R70, -OC(0)OR70, -OC(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)R70, -NR70C(S)R70, -NR70C(O)OR70, -NR70C(S)OR70, -NR70C(O)NR80R80, - R70C(NR70)R70 or - R70C(NR70)NR80R80, where R60, R70, R80 and M+ are as previously defined.
In a preferred embodiment, a group that is substituted has 1 substituent, 1 or 2
substituents, 1, 2, or 3 substituents or 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents.
Also, it is understood that the above definitions are not intended to include impermissible substitution patterns. Such impermissible substitution patterns are understood by a person having ordinary skill in the art.
Additionally, it is understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that if an atom does not appear to have sufficient specific bonds to satisfy valence requirements, such as an apparent trivalent carbon, there are sufficient implicit hydrogens present to satisfy those valence requirements.
A wavy line " -~>~ " or " " or an arrow " * " denoted a point of attachment of a group or moiety.
"Acyl" means, unless otherwise stated, -C(0)R where R is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
"Aliphatic" refers to a substantially hydrocarbon-based compound, or a radical thereof (e.g., C6H13, for a hexane radical), including alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, including cyclic versions thereof, such as alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, and cycloalkynyl, and further including straight- and branched-chain arrangements, and all stereo and position isomers as well. Unless expressly stated otherwise, an aliphatic group contains from one to at least twenty- five carbon atoms; for example, from one to fifteen, from one to ten, from one to six, or from one to four carbon atoms. The term "lower aliphatic" refers to an aliphatic group comprising from one to ten carbon atoms. An aliphatic chain may be substituted or unsubstituted. Unless expressly referred to as an "unsubstituted aliphatic," an aliphatic group can either be unsubstituted or substituted. An aliphatic group can be substituted with one or more substituents (up to two substituents for each methylene [-CH2-] carbon in an aliphatic chain, or up to one substituent for each carbon of a -C=C- double bond in an aliphatic chain, or up to one substituent for a carbon of a terminal methine group). Exemplary aliphatic substituents include, for instance, amino, amide, sulfonamide, halo, cyano, carboxy, hydroxyl, mercapto, trifluoromethyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, thioalkoxy, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, alkylamino, dialkylamino, or other functionality.
"D-aliphatic" refers to an aliphatic group where at least one hydrogen has been substituted by deuterium.
"Alkyl" refers to a hydrocarbon group having a saturated carbon chain, which, unless otherwise specified, may optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described in the definition of "substituted." The chain may be cyclic, branched or unbranched. The term "lower alkyl" means that the alkyl chain includes 1-10 carbon atoms e.g. methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, tert-pentyl, neopentyl, isopentyl, sec- pentyl, 3-pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl or decyl. Also, by way of example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl and an isopropyl group are all represented by the term C1-3 alkyl. Likewise terms indicating larger numerical ranges of carbon atoms are representative of any linear or branched hydrocarbyl falling within the numerical range. This inclusiveness applies to other hydrocarbyl terms bearing such numerical ranges. The terms alkenyl and alkynyl refer to hydrocarbon groups having carbon chains containing one or more double or triple bonds, respectively.
"Alkylene" refers to divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms, that are either straight-chained or branched, which may optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein, unless otherwise specified. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), n-propylene (-CH2CH2CH2-), iso-propylene (-CH2CH(CH3)-) or (-CH(CH3)CH2-), and the like.
"Alkenylene" refers to divalent unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, that are either straight- chained or branched, and include at least one double bond. Unless otherwise specified, the group may be optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene (-CH=CH-) and propenylene (-CH=CHCH2-) and the like.
"Alkynylene" refers to divalent unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, that are either straight- chained or branched and include at least one triple bond. Unless otherwise specified, the group may be optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynylene (-C≡C-) and n-propynylene (-C≡CCH2-) and the like.
"Alkylthio" refers to the group -S -alkyl.
" Alkoxy" refers to the group -O-alkyl. Alkoxy includes, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, t-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, and the like.
"Acyl" refers to the groups H-C(O)- alkyl-C(O)- alkenyl-C(O)- alkynyl-C(O)- cycloalkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkenyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)-, or heterocyclic-C(O)-. By way of example, "acyl" includes the "acetyl" group CH3C(0)-.
"Amino" refers to the group - R'R", wherein R' and R" independently are selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic, or where R' and R" are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a cycloamino group such as a heterocyclic, deuterated heterocyclic, heteroaryl or deuterated heteroaryl group comprising at least one ring nitrogen. Exemplary cycloamino groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidine, pyrrole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, piperidine, triazinane, piperazine, morpholine, azepane, diazepane, azocane, diazocane, azonane or azecane.
"Aminocarbonyl" refers to a chemical functional group -C(=0)-amino, where amino is as defined herein. A primary aminocarbonyl is -CONH2. "Aminocarbonyl" also refers to the group -C(0) R R , wherein R' and R independently are selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic, or where R21 and R22 are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a heterocyclic group.
"Aminosulfonyl" refers refers to a chemical function group -S02-amino. A primary aminosulfonyl is -S02NH2. Certain embodiments refer to the group -S02NR R where R and R are independently are selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclic, or where R and R are optionally joined together with the nitrogen bound thereto to form a heterocyclic group.
"Aryl" or "Ar" refers to an aromatic moiety, such as a carbocyclic group of from 6 to 15 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl) in which at least one of the condensed rings is aromatic (e.g., 2-benzoxazolinone, 2H- l,4-benzoxazin-3(4H)-one-7-yl, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene, and the like), provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of the aromatic aryl group. Unless otherwise specified, the aryl group may be optionally be substituted, particularly with substituents as described herein.
Preferred aryl groups include phenyl and naphthyl.
"Alkenyl" refers to straight chain or branched hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms and preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms and having at least 1 double bond. Unless otherwise specified, the alkenyl group may be optionally substituted. Such groups are exemplified, for example, bi-vinyl, allyl, and but-3-en-l-yl. Included within this term are the cis and trans isomers or mixtures of these isomers, unless otherwise specified.
"Alkynyl" refers to straight chain or branched hydrocarbyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, and preferably 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and having at least 1 site of triple bond unsaturation. Unless otherwise specified, the alkynyl group may be optionally substituted. Such groups are exemplified, for example, by ethynyl, 1-propynyl and 2-propynyl.
"Boronic acid" refers to the groups -B(OR)2, where each R independently is selected from H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or where the R substituents form a ring, such as in a picolinate
Figure imgf000028_0001
Cyano" refers to the chemical functional group
"Carboxyl," "carboxylic acid" or "carboxy" refers to the chemical functional group
-C02H.
"Carboxyl ester," "carboxylic acid ester," or "carboxy ester" refers to the chemical functional group -C02R where R is aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
"Cycloalkyl" refers to a cyclic alkyl group of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having a single ring, which, unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted. Examples of suitable cycloalkyl groups include, for instance, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl and the like.
"Cycloalkenyl" refers to a cyclic alkenyl group of from 3 to 10 carbon atoms having a single ring, which, unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted. Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, and
cyclobutenyl.
Halo", "halide" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo, and iodo and is preferably fluoro or chloro.
"Hydroxy" or "hydroxyl" refers to the group -OH.
"Heteroaliphatic" refers to an aliphatic compound or group having at least one heteroatom, i.e., one or more carbon atoms has been replaced with an atom having at least one lone pair of electrons, typically nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, silicon, or sulfur. Heteroaliphatic compounds or groups may be substituted or unsubstituted, branched or unbranched, cyclic or acyclic, and include "heterocycle", "heterocyclyl", "heterocycloaliphatic", or "heterocyclic" groups. Examples of heterocycles include morpholine and piperidine.
"D-heteroaliphatic" refers to a heteroaliphatic group where at least one hydrogen has been substituted by a deuterium.
"Heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and at least one, and more typically 1 to 4, heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen or sulfur within the ring. Unless otherwise specified, the heteroaryl group may be optionally substituted. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridinyl, imidazolyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl, quinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzopyrazolyl or benzothienyl), wherein at least one of the condensed rings is aromatic and may or may not contain a heteroatom, provided that the point of attachment is through an atom of an aromatic ring. In one embodiment, the nitrogen and/or sulfur ring atom(s) of the heteroaryl group are optionally oxidized to provide N-oxide (N→0), sulfinyl, or sulfonyl moieties. Preferred heteroaryls include pyridinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, thiophenyl, benzopyrazolyl and furanyl.
"Heterocycle," "heterocyclic," "heterocycloalkyl," and "heterocyclyl" refer to a saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused, bridged and spiro ring systems, and having from 3 to 15 ring atoms, including at least one, and more typically 1 to 4, hetero atoms. The hetero atoms are selected from nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen. Unless otherwise specified, the group may be optionally substituted. In fused ring systems, one or more of the rings can be cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, provided that the point of attachment is through a non-aromatic ring. In one embodiment, the nitrogen and/or sulfur atom(s) of the heterocyclic group are optionally oxidized to provide for the N-oxide, -S(O)-, or -SO2- moieties.
Examples of heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azetidine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophene, thiazole, thiazolidine, thiophene, benzo[b]thiophene, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl (also referred to as thiamorpholinyl), 1,1- dioxothiomorpholinyl, piperidinyl, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
"Nitro" refers to the group -N02.
"Polycyclic" refers to a saturated or unsaturated polycyclic ring system having from about 5 to about 25 carbon atoms and having two or more rings (e.g. 2, 3, 4, or 5 rings). The rings can be fused and/or bridged to form the polycyclic ring system, and unless otherwise specified, may be optionally substituted. For example, the term includes bicyclo [4,5], [5,5], 5,6] or [6,6] ring systems, as well as the following bridged ring systems:
Figure imgf000030_0001
(i.e., [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3],
[3.3.2], [3.2.2], [3.3.1] and [4.1.1] polycyclic rings, respectively), and adamantyl. Polycyclic groups can be linked to the remainder of the compound through any synthetically feasible position. If a stereocenter is created then all possible stereocenters are contemplated. Like the other polycarbocycles, these representative bicyclo and fused ring systems can optionally comprise one or more double bonds in the ring system.
"Sulfonyl" refers to the group -SO2-, and includes -SC -alkyl, -SC -alkenyl,
-SC -cycloalkyl, -SC -cycloalkenyl, -SC -aryl, -SC -heteroaryl, or -SC -heterocyclic, wherein alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic are as defined herein. Sulfonyl includes groups such as methyl-S02- phenyl-S02- and 4- methylphenyl-S02-
"Carboxyl bioisosteric," or "carboxyl bioisostere" refer to a group with similar physical or chemical properties to a carboxyl group that produce broadly similar biological properties, but which may reduce toxicity or modify the activity of the compound, and may alter the metabolism of the compound. Exemplary carboxyl bioisosteres include, but are not limited to,
Figure imgf000030_0002
Figure imgf000030_0003
where X7, Y7, and Z7 are each independently selected from N, CH2 or CO
Figure imgf000031_0001
where X9 is selected from O, N, S, CH or CH2;
Figure imgf000031_0002
. Additional carboxyl bioisosteric groups contemplated by the present disclosure include
Figure imgf000031_0003
Figure imgf000031_0004
Particular examples of the presently disclosed compounds include one or more asymmetric centers; thus these compounds can exist in different stereoisomeric forms.
Accordingly, compounds and compositions may be provided as individual pure enantiomers or as stereoisomeric mixtures, including racemic mixtures. In certain embodiments the compounds disclosed herein are synthesized in or are purified to be in substantially enantiopure form, such as in a 90% enantiomeric excess, a 95% enantiomeric excess, a 97% enantiomeric excess or even in greater than a 99% enantiomeric excess, such as in enantiopure form.
Prodrugs of the disclosed compounds also are contemplated herein. A prodrug is an active or inactive compound that is modified chemically through in vivo physiological action, such as hydrolysis, metabolism and the like, into an active compound following administration of the prodrug to a subject. The term "prodrug" as used throughout this text means the pharmacologically acceptable derivatives such as esters, amides and phosphates, such that the resulting in vivo biotransformation product of the derivative is the active drug as defined in the compounds described herein. Prodrugs preferably have excellent aqueous solubility, increased bioavailability and are readily metabolized into the active inhibitors in vivo. Prodrugs of a compounds described herein may be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either by routine manipulation or in vivo, to the parent compound. The suitability and techniques involved in making and using prodrugs are well known by those skilled in the art. For a general discussion of prodrugs involving esters see Svensson and Tunek, Drug Metabolism Reviews 165 (1988) and Bundgaard, Design of Prodrugs, Elsevier (1985).
"Prodrug" also is intended to include any covalently bonded carriers that release an active parent drug of the present invention in vivo when the prodrug is administered to a subject. Since prodrugs often have enhanced properties relative to the active agent pharmaceutical, such as, solubility and bioavailability, the compounds disclosed herein can be delivered in prodrug form. Thus, also contemplated are prodrugs of the presently disclosed compounds, methods of delivering prodrugs and compositions containing such prodrugs. Prodrugs of the disclosed compounds typically are prepared by modifying one or more functional groups present in the compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved, either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to yield the parent compound. Prodrugs include compounds having a phosphonate and/or amino group functionalized with any group that is cleaved in vivo to yield the corresponding amino and/or phosphonate group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, without limitation, compounds having an acylated amino group, an ascorbate moiety, an ortho ester, an imidate group and/or a phosphonate ester or phosphonate amide group.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound, which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like. If the molecule contains a basic functionality, pharmaceutically acceptable salts include salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as
hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate, and the like.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable excipient" refers to a substantially physiologically inert substance that is used as an additive in a pharmaceutical composition. As used herein, an excipient may be incorporated within particles of a pharmaceutical composition, or it may be physically mixed with particles of a pharmaceutical composition. An excipient can be used, for example, as a carrier, flavoring, thickener, diluent, buffer, preservative, or surface active agent and/or to modify properties of a pharmaceutical composition. Examples of excipients include, but are not limited, to polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (also known as vitamin E TPGS, or TPGS), dipalmitoyl phosphatidyl choline (DPPC), trehalose, sodium bicarbonate, glycine, sodium citrate, and lactose.
"Enteric coating" refers to a coating such as may be applied to disclosed compounds or compositions comprising the compounds to help protect drugs from disintegration, digestion etc. in the stomach, such as by enzymes or the pH of the stomach. Typically, the coating helps prevent the drug from being digested in the stomach, and allows delivery of the medication to the intestine.
"Administer," "administering", "administration," and the like, as used herein, refer to methods that may be used to enable delivery of agents or compositions to the desired site of biological action. These methods include, but are not limited to oral routes, intraduodenal routes and rectal administration. Administration techniques that are optionally employed with the agents and methods described herein are found in sources e.g., Goodman and Gilman, The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, current ed.; Pergamon; and Remington's,
Pharmaceutical Sciences (current edition), Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. In certain embodiments, the agents and compositions described herein are administered orally.
"Calorie" refers to the amount of energy, e.g. heat, required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of water by 1 °C. In various fields such as medicine, nutrition, and the exercise sciences, the term "calorie" is often used to describe a kilocalorie. A kilocalorie is the amount of energy needed to increase the temperature of 1 kilogram of water by 1 °C. One kilocalorie equals 1000 calories. The kilocalorie is abbreviated as kc, kcal or Cal, whereas the calorie or gram calorie is abbreviated as cal. In some embodiments, food intake in the subject is measured in terms of overall calorie consumption. Likewise, in some embodiments, fat intake can be measured in terms of calories from fat.
"Co-administration," "administered in combination with," and their grammatical equivalents, are meant to encompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a subject, and are intended to include treatment regimens in which the agents are administered by the same or different route of administration or at the same (e.g., contemporaneously) or different times. In some embodiments the agents described herein will be co-administered with other agents. These terms encompass administration of two or more agents to the subject so that both agents and/or their metabolites are present in the subject at the same time. They include simultaneous administration in separate compositions, administration at different times in separate compositions, and/or administration in a composition in which both agents are present.
Thus, in some embodiments, the agents described herein and the other agent(s) are administered in a single composition. In some embodiments, the agents described herein and the other agent(s) are admixed in the composition.
"effective amount," "pharmaceutically effective amount" or "therapeutically effective amount," refer to a sufficient amount of at least one agent being administered to achieve a desired result, e.g., to relieve to some extent one or more symptoms of a disease or condition being treated (e.g., LADA). In certain instances, the result is a reduction and/or alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of a disease, or any other desired alteration of a biological system. In certain instances, an "effective amount" for therapeutic uses is the amount of the composition comprising an agent as set forth herein required to provide a clinically significant decrease in a disease. An appropriate "effective" amount in any individual case can be determined using any suitable technique, such as a dose escalation study.
"Enhancing enteroendocrine peptide secretion" refers to a sufficient increase in the level of the enteroendocrine peptide agent to, for example, decrease hunger in a subject, to curb appetite in a subject and/or decrease the food intake of a subject or individual and/or treat any disease or disorder described herein.
"FXR": farnesoid X receptor (also known as nuclear receptor subfamily 1, group H, member 4 (NR1H4)) (e.g., OMEVI: 603826): This protein functions as a receptor for bile acids, and when bound to bile acids, regulates the expression of genes involved in bile acid synthesis and transport. FXR is expressed at high levels in the liver and intestine. Chenodeoxycholic acid and other bile acids are natural ligands for FXR. Similar to other nuclear receptors, when activated, FXR translocates to the cell nucleus, forms a dimer (in this case a heterodimer with RXR) and binds to hormone response elements on DNA, which up- or down-regulates the expression of certain genes. One of the primary functions of FXR activation is the suppression of cholesterol 7 alpha-hydroxylase (CYP7A1), the rate- limiting enzyme in bile acid synthesis from cholesterol. FXR does not directly bind to the CYP7A1 promoter. Rather, FXR induces expression of small heterodimer partner (SHP), which then functions to inhibit transcription of the CYP7A1 gene. In this way, a negative feedback pathway is established in which synthesis of bile acids is inhibited when cellular levels are already high. FXR sequences are publically available, for example from GenBank® sequence database (e.g., accession numbers
NP_001193906 (human, protein) and NP_001156976 (mouse, protein), and NM OO 1206977
(human, nucleic acid) and NM 001163504 (mouse, nucleic acid)).
"Metabolic disorder" refers to any disorder that involves an alteration in the normal metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, nucleic acids or a combination thereof. A metabolic disorder is associated with either a deficiency or excess in a metabolic pathway resulting in an imbalance in metabolism of nucleic acids, proteins, lipids, and or carbohydrates. Factors affecting metabolism include, but are not limited to, the endocrine (hormonal) control system (e.g., the insulin pathway, the enteroendocrine hormones including GLP-1, GLP-2, oxyntomodulin, PYY or the like), the neural control system (e.g., GLP-1 in the brain) or the like. Examples of metabolic disorders include and are not limited to diabetes, insulin resistance, dyslipidemia (such as an elevated serum lipids and or triglycerides, such as a serum LDL of at least 100 mg/dL, such as at least 130 mg/dL, at least 160 mg/dL or at least 200 mg/dL, such as 100 to 129 mg/dL, 130 to 159 mg/dL, 160 to 199 mg/dL or greater than 200 mg/dL, and/or such as a serum triglyceride of at least of at least 151 mg/dL, such as at least 200 mg/dL, or at least 500 mg/dL, such as 151 to 199 mg/dL, 200 to 499 mg/dL or greater than 499 mg/dL), metabolic syndrome, or the like.
"Metabolic rate" refers to the rate at which the subject uses energy. This is also known as the rate of metabolism, or the rate of energy consumption, and reflects the overall activity of the individual's metabolism. The term basal metabolism refers to the minimum amount of energy required to maintain vital functions in an individual at complete rest, measured by the basal metabolic rate in a fasting individual who is awake and resting in a comfortably warm environment. The term "basal metabolic rate" refers to the rate at which energy is used by an individual at rest. Basal metabolic rate is measured in humans by the heat given off per unit time, and expressed as the calories released per kilogram of body weight or per square meter of body surface per hour. The heart beating, breathing, maintaining body temperature, and other basic bodily functions all contribute to basal metabolic rate. Basal metabolic rate can be determined to be the stable rate of energy metabolism measured in individuals under conditions of minimum environmental and physiological stress, or essentially at rest with no temperature change. The basal metabolic rate among individuals can vary widely. One example of an average value for basal metabolic rate is about 1 calorie per hour per kilogram of body weight.
"Non-systemic" or "minimally absorbed" as used herein refer to low systemic bioavailability and or absorption of an administered compound. In some instances a non- systemic compound is a compound that is substantially not absorbed systemically. In some embodiments, FXR agonist compositions described herein deliver an FXR agonist to the distal ileum, colon, and or rectum and not systemically (e.g., a substantial portion of the FXR agonist administered is not systemically absorbed). In some embodiments, the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is <0.1%, <0.3%, <0.5%, <0.6%, <0.7%, <0.8%, <0.9%, <1%, <1.5%, <2%, <3%, or <5% of the administered dose (wt. % or mol %). In some embodiments, the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is <15% of the administered dose. In some embodiments, the systemic absorption of a non-systemic compound is <25% of the administered dose. In an alternative approach, a non-systemic FXR agonist is a compound that has lower systemic bioavailability relative to the systemic bioavailability of a systemic FXR agonist. In some embodiments, the bioavailability of a non-systemic FXR agonist described herein is <30%, <40%, <50%, <60%, or <70% of the bioavailability of a systemic FXR agonist. In some embodiments, the serum concentration of the FXR agonist in the subject remains below the compound's EC50 following administration (such as a level at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or even at least 50% below the compound's EC50). In one specific example, if the compound's EC50 is about 50 nM, following administration the serum concentration would be below 50 nM, such as less than 40 nM, less than 30 nM or less than 20 nM, for example 1 hour following administration.
"Prevent," "preventing" or "prevention," and other grammatical equivalents as used herein, include preventing additional symptoms, preventing the underlying metabolic causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition, e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition and are intended to include prophylaxis. The terms further include achieving a prophylactic benefit. For prophylactic benefit, the compositions are optionally administered to a patient at risk of developing a particular disease (e.g., LAD A), to a patient reporting one or more of the physiological symptoms of a disease (e.g., LAD A), or to a patient at risk of reoccurrence of the disease (e.g., LAD A).
"Subject", "patient" or "individual" may be used interchangeably herein and refer to mammals and non-mammals, e.g., suffering from LADA. Examples of mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of the mammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like. Examples of non-mammals include, but are not limited to, birds, fish, amphibians, and the like. In one embodiment of the methods and compositions provided herein, the mammal is a human.
"Treat," "treating" or "treatment," and other grammatical equivalents as used herein, include alleviating, inhibiting or reducing symptoms, reducing or inhibiting severity of, reducing incidence of, prophylactic treatment of, reducing or inhibiting recurrence of, preventing, delaying onset of, delaying recurrence of, abating or ameliorating a disease or condition symptoms, ameliorating the underlying metabolic causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition, e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition, relieving the disease or condition, causing regression of the disease or condition, relieving a condition caused by the disease or condition, or stopping the symptoms of the disease or condition, wherein the disease can be LADA. The terms further include achieving a therapeutic benefit. Therapeutic benefit means eradication or amelioration of the underlying disorder being treated, and/or the eradication or amelioration of one or more of the physiological symptoms associated with the underlying disorder, such that an improvement is observed in the patient. II. Overview
Disclosed herein are methods of using compounds that have activity as FXR agonists that are structurally distinct from bile acids, other synthetic FXR ligands, and other natural FXR ligands, to treat or prevent LADA. Such methods include administering a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists to the GI tract of a subject, such as one or more of the FXR agonists disclosed herein. The absorption of these FXR agonists is substantially restricted to the intestinal lumen when delivered orally (e.g., serum levels of the compound are below the compound's EC50 following administration of the compound, such as about 1 hour later). In various embodiments, administration of one or more FXR agonists results in activation of FXR transcriptional activity in the intestine, without substantially affecting other target tissues, such as liver or kidney.
Farnesoid X receptor (FXR) is a key component in regulating metabolic homeostasis including glucose and lipid metabolism as well as bile acid (BA) homeostasis. Fexaramine (Fex) is a gut-specific FXR agonist that can reduce diet-induced weight gain, body- wide inflammation and hepatic glucose production, while enhancing thermogenesis and browning of white adipose tissue. It is shown herein that Fex restores pancreatic β cell functions with robustly enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in diabetic mice without body weight changes. It is shown that Fex potentiates bioenergetics to enhance GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells. Concomitantly, Fex increases gene expression of glucagon- like peptide- 1 receptor (GLP-1 R) in pancreatic β cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in β cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia in ob/ob mice. Furthermore, Fex analogs, including Fex-D, are more effective at glucose lowering than Fex. Based on these observations, methods of activating enteroendocrinal FXR to treat LADA are provided. III. Compounds
Disclosed herein are farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonist compounds, which can be used in disclosed embodiments of the method. Without limitation, these embodiments include compounds of Formula 1-35. Certain compounds are chiral, and all stereoisomers are included in this disclosure, as well as all geometric and structural isomers such as cis and trans isomers.
A. Farnesoid X Receptor (FXR) Agonist Compounds According to Formulas 1-18 Certain disclosed compound embodiments have the structure of formula 1
Figure imgf000038_0001
Formula 1
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R is selected from
Figure imgf000038_0002
Figure imgf000038_0003
is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; La and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi- bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1; and X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl. In some embodiments when Rb is hydrogen, the compounds have activity as FXR agonists. In other embodiments when Rb is hydrogen, the compounds may have reduced or substantially no activity as FXR agonists.
Also with reference to formula 1, any or all of the following provisos may apply:
if W is CH2 and Lc and Ld are both H, then X is not a benzopyran; ifR is
Figure imgf000039_0001
, Lc and Ld are both H, and La and Lb are both H or together form a pi-bond, then X is not a benzopyran;
X is not substituted with -R^IZ-R*2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; 2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, - S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; and
Figure imgf000039_0002
, Re and Rfa are all hydrogen, Y is CH and La and Lb are both H or together form a pi-bond, then
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rb is methyl, and R^ is H then X is not phenyl, 4-biphenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 3-bromophenyl, 2-bromophenyl, 4-tert-butylphenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-(3,4-difluorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- acetylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methylthiophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2-methoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenyl, 4- (4-tert-butylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-ethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-chlorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- methylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-methylphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2-methoxy-5-chlorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(3- trifluoromethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)phenyl, 4-(4-
Figure imgf000039_0003
Figure imgf000040_0001
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rft is H and X is then Rb is not methyl, ethyl or tert-butyl;
if Rb is methyl, Rfc is H and X is
Figure imgf000040_0002
then Ra is not cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl;
if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rft is H and X is
Figure imgf000040_0003
then Rb is not methyl or tert-butyl; if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rb is methyl, R is H and X is
Figure imgf000041_0001
then
Rh is not hydroxyl, (trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl-O, methoxy, O-benzyl, OCH2C02Et, OC(0)CH3, OC(0)Ph or OS02CH3; and if Ra is cyclohexyl, Rb is methyl, R is H and X is
Figure imgf000041_0002
then Rh iis not -
CH=CHC(0)OMe, -CH=CHC(0)OEt, -CH=CHC(0)NMe2, -CH=CHC(0)NHlBu, - CH=CHC(0)OtBu, -CH=CHC(0)OiPr, -CH=CHC(0)OCH2Ph, -CH=CHC(0)OH, - CH=CHCH2OMe, -CH=CHCH2OEt or -CH=CHCH2OPh.
In some embodiments of formula 1, Rb is substituted with substituents that improve the compounds water solubility. In certain embodiments, Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl, each substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
In some embodiments, Ra is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups, or a lower PEG group, such as PEG 2, PEG 3, PEG 4, PEG 5, PEG 6, PEG 8, PEG 10.
In some embodiments, X is not a benzopyran.
Figure imgf000041_0003
, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 2
Figure imgf000041_0004
Formula 2.
In some disclosed embodiments, the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 3
Figure imgf000041_0005
Formula 3
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. With reference to formula 3, R1 is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or polycyclic; R2 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is selected from N, N-0 (N-oxide) or C- R3d; R3a, R3b, R3c and R3d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; R4a and R4b are each independently selected from hydrogen (H), deuterium (D), halide or alkyl; L1 and L2 are independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; and R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d and R5e are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl or nitro, or any two adjacent groups selected together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring. In some embodiments when R2 is hydrogen, the compounds have activity as FXR agonists. In other embodiments when R2 is hydrogen, the compounds may have reduced or substantially no activity as FXR agonists.
Also with reference to formula 2, in some embodiments, none of R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d or R5e is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; R*2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or
cycloalkenyl; and
if L1 and L2 are both hydrogen or together form a pi-bond then at least one of the following conditions applies: Y is N or C-halogen; or R1 is polycyclic; or R4a is D; or R5a is F, CI, I; or R5d and R5e together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; or R5b and R5c together form an aryl, cycloalkyl, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic or nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring, or any combination thereof.
In some embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more groups that improve the compounds water solubility. In certain embodiments, R2 is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
In some embodiments, one or more of R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d or R5e is selected from
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000043_0002
, where R5h is alkyl, alkenyl, hydrogen, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclic.
In particular embodiments, L1 and L2 together form a pi-bond, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 4
Figure imgf000043_0003
Formula 4.
In some embodiments of general formula 4, Y is CR , leading to compounds having the structure of formula 5
Figure imgf000043_0004
Formula 5.
With reference to formula 5, R3d or R5a or both are halogen, such as F, CI, Br or I, and R1, R2, R3a, R3b, R3c, R4a, R4b, R5b, R5c, R5d and R5e are defined as for formula 3, above. In some working embodiments, R3d or R5a or both are F.
In other embodiments of formula 4, Y is N, resulting in compounds having the structure of formula 6
Figure imgf000043_0005
Formula 6 where R1, R2, R3a, R3b, R3c, R4a, R4b, R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d and R5e are defined as for formula 3.
In certain embodiments of formula 4, R1 is polycyclic. This leads to compounds having the structure of formula 7
Figure imgf000044_0001
Formula 7.
With reference to formula 7, R2, R3a, R3b, R3c, R4a, R4b, R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d, R5e and Y are defined as for formula 3 above. In some examples, the polycyclic is selected from
Figure imgf000044_0002
Figure imgf000044_0003
polycyclic is selected from [2.1.1], [2.2.1], [3.3.3], [4.3.1], [2.2.2], [4.2.2], [4.2.1], [4.3.2], [3.1.1], [3.2.1], [4.3.3], [3.3.2], 3.2.2], [3.3.1], [4.1.1], or adamantyl. In certain working embodiments the polycyclic is
Figure imgf000044_0004
In certain embodiments of general formula 3, R5c is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring. Exemplary nitrogen-containing heteroaryl rings include, but are not limited to, pyridine, pyrazole, pyrrole, imidazole, oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, triazole, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazine, benzopyrazole, benzimidazole, indole, quinoline, indazole, purine, quinoxaline, and acridine. In particular embodiments, the compounds have the structure of formula 8
Figure imgf000044_0005
Formula 8.
With reference to formula 8, R1, R2, R3a, R3b, R3c, R4a, R4b, R5a, R5b, R5d, R5e and Y are defined as for formula 3, R6a, R6c, R6d and R6g are each independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl, R6h is selected from H, D, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl, and Z is selected from N, CH or C-alkyl. In certain working embodiments, Z is N and/or R6h is methyl. In some examples R6a, R6c, R6d and R6g are all hydrogen. In particular examples, Y is C-R3d and at least one of R3d and R5a is F.
In certain embodiments of general formula 5, R5c is a 4-aminophenyl, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 9
Figure imgf000045_0001
Formula 9.
With reference to formula 9, R1, R2, R3a, R3b, R3c, R3d, R4, R5a, R5b, R5d and R5e are defined as for formula 5, R6a, R6b, R6c and R6d are each independently selected from H, D, halogen or alkyl, G is a lone pair of electrons or an oxygen, and R6e and R6f are each independently selected from alkyl, H or cycloalkyl, with the provisos that R3d or R5a or both are halogen, or R4 is D, or R1 is polycyclic, or any combination thereof. In working embodiments, R6e and R6f are both methyl.
In certain embodiments, compounds having formula 9 are N-oxides, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 10
Figure imgf000046_0001
Formula 10.
In particular examples of any of the above embodiments R4a is D, R4b is H, and/or R2 is methyl. In other examples, both R4a and R4b are D. And in particular embodiments of formulas 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 or 10, R1 is cyclohexyl.
In some disclosed embodiments, compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 11
Figure imgf000046_0002
Formula 11
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ra is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each
independently selected from h drogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; X is aryl, heterocyclic or
Figure imgf000046_0003
La and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -
(C(L°)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1; and X is not substituted with -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, - C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; IT2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, - ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx5 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In some disclosed embodiments, the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 12
Figure imgf000047_0001
Formula 12
Figure imgf000047_0002
cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1 ; R1 is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or polycyclic; R2 is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is selected from N, N-0 (N-oxide) or C-R3d; R3a, R3b, R3c and R3d are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; R4a and R4b are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d and R5e are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl,
aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, hydroxyl or nitro, or any two adjacent groups selected together form an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclic ring; and none of R5a, R5b, R5c, R5d or R5e is -RMZ-R*2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; R"2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; IT2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In some other embodiments, the compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 13
Figure imgf000048_0001
Formula 13
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R is selected from
Figure imgf000048_0002
Figure imgf000048_0003
and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1 ; Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; Rh and Rj are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, alkenyl, aryl or heteroaryl; X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl; and X is not substituted with -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NR , sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L"2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, - S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In some embodiments, prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 14
Figure imgf000049_0001
Formula 14
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ra is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl; Ry and Rz are selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, or Ry and Rz may together form a cycloheteroalkyl ring; La and Lb are independently H, D or alkyl or together form a π-bond, a cyclopropyl or an epoxide ring; Lc and Ld are independently H, D or alkyl; and X is not substituted with -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L*2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, - S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In particular embodiments of formula 14, Ry and Rz together form a 5-membered heteroalkyl ring substituted with an ascorbate moiety, leading to compounds having the structure of formula 15
Figure imgf000050_0001
Formula 15.
In other embodiments, prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 16
Figure imgf000050_0002
Formula 16
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein Ra is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl, La and Lb are independently H, D or alkyl or together form a π-bond, a cyclopropyl or an epoxide ring; Lc and Ld are independently H, D or alkyl; and X is not substituted with -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or - C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; R is selected from -C(0)L Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; L is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, - C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In still further embodiments, prodrugs of compounds having activity as FXR agonists have the structure of formula 17
Figure imgf000051_0001
Formula 17
Figure imgf000051_0002
La and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond; Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-; s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6; n is 0 or 1; Ra is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic; Rb is selected from alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N-oxide); Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro; Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; Rk and Rm are independently selected from H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, or together Rk and Rm form a cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl ring; X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl; and X is not substituted with -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, alkylene, alkenylene, alkynylene, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl; Rx2 is selected from ^(0)Ι/¾χ8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRX , Rx8 is H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, -S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, - S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl.
In some embodiments of formula 17 Rk and Rm together form a 5-membered ring, leading to compounds having a s
Figure imgf000052_0001
Formula 18
or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein each Rn is independently selected from H, alkyl, or a metal salt such as Na, K, or Li.
In any of the above embodiments of formulas 1, 9 or 13-18, X is heteroaryl or heterocyclic, and in particular embodiments, X is pyridine or piperidine.
In other embodiments of formulas 1, 10, 11, or 13-18, X is a phenyl substituted with an aryl or heteroaryl group. In certain embodiments, X is a phenyl substituted with the aryl or heteroaryl group selected from benzoxazine, dihydrobenzoxazine, quinoxaline,
tetrahydroquinoxaline, benzodioxane, benzothiazine, dihydrobenzothiazine,
dihydrobenzothiazine- 1,1 -dioxide, benzodithiine, benzodithiine- 1,1,4,4-tetraoxide, benzofuran, benzothiophene, indole, benzisoxazole, indazole, benzotriazole, benzimidazole, benzoxazole, benzthiazole or benzisothiazole. In particular embodiments, X is selected from
Figure imgf000052_0002
Figure imgf000053_0001
A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that compounds of any of the above embodiments may have one or more stereocenter, and that each stereocenter independently may have an R or S configuration.
A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that prodrug compounds satisfying one of formulas 14-18 may also have intrinsic activity as FXR agonists, as well as acting as a prodrug for a compound having FXR activity.
Exemplary compounds having activity as FXR agonists and satisfying one or more of the general formulas 1-18 are provided below.
Figure imgf000053_0002
NSSK00036 NSSK00008
NSSK00019
NSSK00007 NSSK00020 NSSK00009
Figure imgf000054_0001
NSSK00022 NSSK00037 NSSK00001
Figure imgf000054_0002
NSSK00002 NSSK00033
Figure imgf000054_0003
NSSK00012 NSSK00011 NSSK00014
NSSK00013 NSSK00016 NSSK00026
Figure imgf000054_0004
Figure imgf000055_0001
Figure imgf000056_0001
NSSK00065 NSSK00097 NSSK00095
NSSK00094 NSSK00100 NSSK00092
NSSK00099 NSSK00093 NSSK00087
NSSK00098 NSSK00077 NSSK00101
NSSK00080 NSSK00079 NSSK00078
Figure imgf000057_0001
NSSK00082 NSSK001 13 NSSK00086
NSSK00081 NSSK00102 NSSK00070
Figure imgf000058_0001
Figure imgf000059_0001
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
Other exemplary working embodiments include:
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)bicyclo[2.2. l]heptane-2- carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(l-methyl-N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)piperidine-4- carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((9-fluoro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,4S)-N-((9-fluoro- 1-methyl- lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((9-fluoro- 1-methyl- lH-benzo[f]indazol-8-yl)methyl)-l-methylpiperidine-4- carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((9-fluoro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((9-fluoro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-((lR,4S)-N-((9-fluoro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((9-chloro-l-methyl-lH-benzo[f]indazol-8- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(( 1 R,4S)-N-((9-chloro- 1 -methyl- 1 H-benzo[f] indazol-8- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3 -(N-((9-chloro- 1 -methyl- 1 H-benzo[f] indazol-8-yl)methyl)- 1 -methylpiperidine-4- carboxamido)- 5 -fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((7-(dimethylamino)naphthalen-l- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((7-(dimethylamino)-8-fluoronaphthalen-l- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-( 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4-( 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl-d)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)-l-methylpiperidine-4- carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5- N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-(2-fluoro-4-(l -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)pyridin-3- yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3- N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl-d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)benzamido)pyridin-3- yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3 -(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4- yl)methyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)benzamido)pyridin-3- yl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3- N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l -methyl- 1 H-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-(2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)benzamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)pyridin-3- yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-(2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5- yl)benzyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((2-chloro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)benzamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)benzamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)benzamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3 -(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)benzamido)-5- fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5- N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)benzyl)benzamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(5-(N-((4-( 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl-d)benzamido)pyridin-3- yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((3-chloro-4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5 -(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)benzamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(5-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)pyridin-3-yl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2-(tert-butoxy)-2- oxoethoxy)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
tert-butyl (E)-2-(4-((N-(3-(3-methoxy-3-oxoprop- 1 -en- 1 - yl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)methyl)phenyl)cyclopropane-l-carboxylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-3- yl)methyl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
cyclobutyl (E)-3-(4-((N-(3-((E)-3-methoxy-3-oxoprop-l-en-l- yl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)methyl)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(6-methoxypyridin-3- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((5-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)pyridin-2- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)piperazin-l- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][l,4]oxazin-7- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2H-benzo[b][l,4]oxazin-7- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][l,4]dioxin-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3- N-(4-(quinoxalin-6-yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoxalin-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b] [1 ,4]thiazin-7- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-( 1 , 1 -dioxido-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b] [ 1 ,4]thiazin-7- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-( 1 , 1 ,4,4-tetraoxido-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b] [ 1 ,4]dithiin-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclopropane-l-carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclobutane-l-carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclopentane- 1 -carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4- yl)methyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclohexane-l-carboxylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(benzo[d]oxazol-6-yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2-methylbenzo[d]thiazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2-methylbenzo[d]oxazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(2-methyl-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(l ,2-dimethyl- lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(l-methyl-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(benzo[d]isoxazol-5-yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-(4-(benzo[d]isothiazol-5- yl)benzyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl 3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2- carboxamido)phenyl)propanoate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2- carboxamido)phenoxy)acetate,
3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2- carboxamido)benzyl acetate,
N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l, -biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl)-N-(3-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-3- yl)methyl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamide,
N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl)-N-(3-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4- yl)methyl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamide,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2-(tert-butoxy)-2-oxoethoxy)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
tert-butyl (E)-2-(4-((N-(3-(3-methoxy-3-oxoprop-l-en-l- yl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)methyl-d)phenyl)cyclopropane-l-carboxylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)methyl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
cyclobutyl (E)-3-(4-((N-(3-((E)-3-methoxy-3-oxoprop- 1 -en- 1 - yl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamido)methyl-d)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(6-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((5-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)pyridin-2-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)piperazin-l-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][l,4]oxazin-7-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2H-benzo[b][l,4]oxazin-7-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2,3-dihydrobenzo[b][l,4]dioxin-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(quinoxalin-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoxalin-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b][l,4]thiazin-7-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-( 1 , 1 -dioxido-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[b] [ 1 ,4]thiazin-7-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-( 1 , 1 ,4,4-tetraoxido-2,3-dihydrobenzo[b] [ 1 ,4]dithiin-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclopropane- 1 -carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclobutane- 1 -carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclopentane- 1 -carboxylate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)cyclohexane- 1 -carboxylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(benzo[d]oxazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2-methylbenzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2-methylbenzo[d]oxazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(2-methyl-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(l,2-dimethyl-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-benzo[d]imidazol-6-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(benzo[d]isoxazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(N-((4-(benzo[d]isothiazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl 3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2- carboxamido)phenyl)propanoate,
methyl 2-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2- carboxamido)phenoxy)acetate,
3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2- carboxamido)benzyl acetate,
N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl-d)-N-(3-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-3- yl)methyl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamide,
N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl-d)-N-(3-((2-oxotetrahydro-2H-pyran-4- yl)methyl)phenyl)cyclohexanecarboxamide,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate, methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3 -(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-( 1 -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-( 1 -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, or
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate. In some embodiments, the compound is selected from
Figure imgf000074_0001
methyl (E)-3-(3-f|uoro-5-(W-((4-(1 -methyl-1 H-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- Qf)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate
Figure imgf000074_0002
methyl (E)-3-(3-(W-((2-fluoro-4-(1 -methyl-1 W-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- c')cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate
Figure imgf000074_0003
methyl (E)-3-(3-((l R.4S)-N_((4'_(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[1 ,1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- C)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate
Figure imgf000074_0004
methyl (E)-3-(3-((l R.4S)-N-((4i-(dimethylamino)-[1 ,1 ,-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- ^bicyclop^.ljheptane^-carboxamido^S-fluorophenylJacrylate
Figure imgf000074_0005
methyl (E)-3-(3-(W-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[1 ,1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- ")cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate embodiments, the compound is methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-(( 1 S,2R,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[ 1 , 1 '-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2R,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lS,2S,4R)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2S,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((S)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate,
methyl (E)-3-(3-((lR,2R,4S)-N-((R)-(4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl d)bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptane-2-carboxamido)-5-fluorophenyl)acrylate, methyl (R,E)-3 -(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro- [1,1 '-biphenyl] -4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-3-fluoro-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-(N-((4'-(dimethylamino)-[l,l'-biphenyl]-4-yl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-( 1 -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-fluoro-5-(N-((4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate,
methyl (R,E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-( 1 -methyl- lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate, or
methyl (S,E)-3-(3-(N-((2-fluoro-4-(l-methyl-lH-indazol-5-yl)phenyl)methyl- d)cyclohexanecarboxamido)phenyl)acrylate.
Also provided herein are kits that include any FXR agonist (or composition containing such an agonist) described herein and a device for localized delivery within a region of the intestines, such as the ileum or colon. In certain embodiments, the device is a syringe, bag, or a pressurized container.
B. Farnesoid X Receptor (FXR) Agonist Compounds According to Formulas 19-35 Additional embodiments of farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonist compounds also are disclosed according to formulas 19-35. Certain disclosed FXR agonist compounds have the structure of formula 19
Figure imgf000076_0001
Formula 19. With reference to formula 19, R!-R15 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, D-heteroaliphatic, or -(CH2)nl-R150- (CH2)n2-R151, wherein nl and n2 are independently selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, R150 is O, NR16, or absent, and R151 is carboxyl ester or amino; R16 is selected from hydrogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; Ra and Rb are
independently hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic or D-aliphatic, or together form a pi-bond.
Also with reference to formula 19, in some embodiments, none of R!-R16 is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, aliphatic, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, - S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, aliphatic.
In some embodiments, at least one of R!-R16 is or comprises deuterium.
R7 may be H, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic. In some embodiments, R7 is alkyl or deuterated alkyl, and in certain embodiments, R7 is isopropyl or deuterated isopropyl, having from 1 to 7 deuterium atoms.
In some embodiments, at least one of R!-R5 is a halogen. In certain examples, R2 and R3 are both fluoro.
In some embodiments, R16 is hydrogen.
In some examples, R10 and R11 independently are alkyl or deuterated alkyl, and in certain examples, R10 and R11 independently are methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
In some embodiments, Ra and Rb together form a pi-bond, leading to compounds have the structure of formula 20
Figure imgf000077_0001
Formula 20,
where R!-R16 are as defined above with respect to formula 19, and at least one of R!-R15 is or comprises deuterium.
In other embodiments, Ra and Rb are both hydrogen, leading to compounds having a structure of formula 21
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Also disclosed herein are com ounds having the structure of formula 22
Figure imgf000079_0002
Formula 22.
With reference to formula 22, X is N or CR37; R21-R34 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R is hydrogen, aliphatic, D- aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; and R37 is hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic. In some embodiments, at least one of R21-R35 and R37 is or comprises deuterium, and in certain embodiments, at least one of R21- R35 is or comprises deuterium.
Also with reference to formula 22, in some embodiments, none of R21-R37 is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, aliphatic, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, - S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, aliphatic.
In some embodiments, R35 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, deuterated alkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl.
In certain disclosed embodiments, R35 is cycloalkyl or deuterated cycloalkyl, typically cyclohexyl or deuterated cyclohexyl, having from 1 to 11 deuterium atoms.
In some examples, R36 is hydrogen.
In some embodiments, R32 is carboxyl and/or R34 is CF3.
In some embodiments, R23 is halogen, and in certain embodiments R23 is chloro.
In some embodiments, the compound is chiral, and in certain embodiments, the compound is the /S-stereoisomer.
In some embodiments, X is N, leadin to compounds having a structure of formula 23
Figure imgf000080_0001
Formula 23,
where R21-R36 is as defined above with respect to formula 22, and at least one of R
comprises deuterium. In other embodiments, X is CH, leading to compounds having the structure of formula
Figure imgf000081_0001
Formula 24,
R21-R36 is as defined above with respect to formula 22.
Exemplary compounds having the structure of formula 22 include:
Figure imgf000081_0002
Also disclosed herein are compounds having the structure of formula 25
Figure imgf000082_0001
Formula 25.
With reference to formula 25, R41-R48 and R52-R55 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano,
aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R49- R51 independently are selected from hydrogen, deuterium, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R56 is amino, cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as 5-, 6-, or 7- membered cycloamino; Y and Z are independently N or CR57; and each R57 independently is selected from deuterium, halogen, CF3, N02, OH, amino, acyl, carboxyl, carboxyl ester, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic.
Also with reference to formula 25, in some embodiments, none of R41-R57 is -Rx-Lx-Rx2, where Rx is selected from O, NRx3, sulfonyl or S; Rx3 is selected from H, aliphatic, or aryl; Lx is selected from a bond, aliphatic, heteroaliphatic, aryl, heteroaryl or CRx4Rx5; Rx4 and Rx5 are each independently selected from H, D, halogen, aliphatic, -C(0)ORx6, or -C(0)NRx6Rx7; Rx6 and Rx7 are each independently selected from H, aliphatic; Rx2 is selected from -C(0)Lx2Rx8 or a carboxyl bioisostere; Lx2 is a bond or NRx3; Rx8 is H, aliphatic, -ORx9, N(Rx9)2, -C(0)Rx9, - S(0)2Rx9, -C(0)ORx9, -S(0)2N(Rx9)2 or -C(0)N(Rx9)2; and each Rx9 is independently selected from H, aliphatic.
In some embodiments, at least one of R41-R56 is or comprises deuterium.
In some embodiments, R51 is an aliphatic or D-aliphatic, and in certain embodiments, R51 is a methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms.
In some embodiments, R49 and R50 independently are hydrogen or deuterium.
In some embodiments, R41 and R45 independently are aliphatic or D-aliphatic, and in particular embodiments, R41 and R45 are methyl or deuterated methyl, having from 1 to 3 deuterium atoms. In some embodiments, R is a cycloamino or substituted cycloamino, such as pyrrolidine, 2-methylpyrrolidine, morpholine, 4-methylpiperazine, piperidine, or azepane (homopiperidine) .
In some embodiments, Y is N and Z is N leading to compounds having a structure of formula 26
Figure imgf000083_0001
Formula 26.
In other embodiments, Y is CH and Z is CH leading to compounds having a structure of formula 27
Figure imgf000083_0002
Formula 27.
In other examples, Y is N and Z is CH leading to compounds having a structure of formula 28
Figure imgf000083_0003
Formula 28.
And in other examples Y is CH and Z is N leading to compounds having a structure of formula 29
Figure imgf000084_0001
83
Figure imgf000085_0001
Also disclosed herein are com ounds having the structure of formula 30,
Figure imgf000085_0002
Formula 30
wherein G1 is CH or N; G2 is O or NH; R100 and R101 are independently H, D, halogen, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R102 is aliphatic, heteropaliphatic, D-aliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R103 and R104 are independently H, D, halogen, OH, alkoxy, O- polyhaloalkyl, aliphatic, D-aliphatic, heteroaliphatic or D-heteroaliphatic; R105 and R106 are each independently H, D, halogen, aliphatic or D-aliphatic; R107 and R108 are each independently H, D, aliphatic, D-aliphatic or halogen. In some embodiments, R100 and R101 are independently H, D, lower alkyl, halogen, or CF3; R102 is lower alkyl; R103 and R104 are independently H, D, lower alkyl, halogen, CF3, OH, O-alkyl, or O-polyhaloalkyl; R105 and R106 are each independently H, D, halogen, alkyl or deuterated alkyl; R107 and R108 are each independently H, D, alkyl, deuterated alkyl or halogen. In some embodiments, at least one of R100, R101, R102, R103, R104, R105, R106, R107 and R108 is or comprises deuterium. In some embodiments, at least one of R105, R106, R107 and R108 is or comprises deuterium. In other embodiments, at least one of R107 and R108 is halogen, and may be fluoro.
In certain embodiments, the compound has a structure of formula 31
Figure imgf000086_0001
Formula 31,
wherein G1 is CH or N; G2 is O or NH; R100 and R101 are independently H, lower alkyl, halogen, or CF3; R102 is lower alkyl; R103 and R104 are independently H, lower alkyl, halogen, CF3, OH, O-alkyl, or O-polyhaloalkyl.
Exemplary compounds having a structure of formula 30 or formula 31 include
Figure imgf000086_0002
Other exemplary compounds having the structure of formula 30 or formula 31 include
(E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)styryl)benzoic acid;
(E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d)-5- fluorostyryl-d)benzoic acid;
(E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d2)-5- fluorostyryl-d2)benzoic acid; (E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d2)styryl- d2)benzoic acid;
(E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-(propan-2-yl-l,l,l,3,3,3-d6)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)styryl-d6)benzoic acid; or
(E)-3-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-(propan-2-yl- 1,1,1 ,3,3,3-d6)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)-5-fluorostyryl-d6)benzoic acid.
Also disclosed herein are compounds having the structure of formula 32,
Figure imgf000087_0001
Formula 32,
wherein R205 is selected from the group consisting of COOR210, CONR21 !R212, tetrazolyl,
S02NR211R212, C1-6 alkyl, S02-C1-6 alkyl and H, with R210 independently selected from the group consisting of H or C1-6 alkyl, and R211 and R212 independently from each other selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, halo-C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkylene-R213, S02-C1-6 alkyl, wherein R213 is selected from the group consisting of COOH, OH and S03H;
R206 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotnazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, 0-C1-6 alkyl, 0-halo-C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkyl, halo-C1-6 alkyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, D and halogen;
R207 is selected from N or CH;
R208 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of D, C1-6 alkyl, halo-C1-6 alkyl, halogen and CF3;
R209 is selected from
Figure imgf000087_0002
wherein R = CH, N, NO, CD;
R215 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-3 alkyl, C3.6 cylcoalkyl, C4.5 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein C1-3 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from halogen, hydroxy or C1-6 alkoxy;
R216 and R217 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, D, Ci- 3 alkyl, C1-3 haloalkyl, C1-3 alkoxy, C1-3 haloalkoxy, D-aliphatic and halogen.
R218 and R219 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, R218 and R219 are both H. In other embodiments, at least one of R218 and R219 is D.
In some embodiments, the compound comprises at least one deuterium. In some embodiments, R206 and/or R208 comprise at least one deuterium. In other embodiments, R214 is CD. In certain embodiments, at least one of R216 and R217 is or comprises deuterium.
In some embodiments for compounds having the structure of formula 32, R205.R206 is selected
Figure imgf000088_0001
In some embodiments for compounds having the structure of formula 32, R
Figure imgf000088_0002
In some embodiments for compounds having the structure of formula 32,
Figure imgf000088_0003
R209 is xemplary compounds having the s
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000089_0002
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Other Exemplary compounds having the structure of formula 32 include
3-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-5- fluorophenyl)-3 -hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d)-5- fluorophenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d2)-5- fluorophenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-N-(methylsulfonyl)benzamide;
3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-N-(methylsulfonyl)benzamide; 3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzenesulfonamide;
3- ((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzenesulfonamide;
(ls,3s)-l-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-(3-(methylsulfonyl)phenyl)cyclobutan-l-ol;
(lr,3r)-l-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-(3-(methylsulfonyl)phenyl)cyclobutan-l-ol;
5-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)- 1 -isopropyl- 1 H-pyrazole-3 -carboxylic acid;
5- ((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-l-isopropyl-lH-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid;
6- ((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid;
6-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid;
4- ((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
4-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)benzoic acid;
3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-4-methoxybenzoic acid;
3-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-4-methoxybenzoic acid;
3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-4-methylbenzoic acid;
3-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-4-methylbenzoic acid;
3-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-5-methylbenzoic acid;
3-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-5-methylbenzoic acid; 5-((ls,3s)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-2-methylbenzoic acid;
5-((lr,3r)-3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)-3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-2-methylbenzoic acid;
3-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)phenyl)- 3-hydroxyazetidin- 1 -yl)benzoic acid;
5-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)phenyl)- 3-hydroxyazetidin- l-yl)nicotinic acid; or
2-(3-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)phenyl)- 3-hydroxyazetidin- 1 -yl)isonicotinic acid.
Also disclosed herein are compounds having the structure of formula 33,
Figure imgf000093_0001
R is selected from the group consisting of COOR322, CONR323R324, tetrazolyl or H, with R322 independently selected from the group consisting of H, or lower alkyl, and R323 and R324 independently from each other selected from the group consisting of H, lower alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkylene-R325, S02-C1-6 alkyl wherein R325 is selected from the group consisting of COOH, OH, or S03H;
R319 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, pyrazolyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotriazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl, or halogen;
R320 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, halogen, D or CF3;
Figure imgf000093_0002
wherein R3 6 is CH, N, NO; R327 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d-C3 alkyl, C3-C6 cylcoalkyl, C4-C5 alkylcycloalkyl, wherein C1-3 alkyl is optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from halogen, hydroxy or C1-6 alkoxy,
R328 and R329 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci- C3 alkyl, d-C3 haloalkyl, d-C3 alkoxy, d-C3 haloalkoxy and halogen.
R334 and R335 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, at least one of R334 and R335 are D.
In some embodiments, R320 is substituted with at least one halogen or deuterium.
In some embodiments for compounds having formula 33, R318 is selected from the group consisting of COOR322, CONR323R324, tetrazolyl or H, with R322, R323 and R324 independently selected from the group consisting of H, lower alkyl;
R319 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, indolyl, thienyl, benzothienyl, indazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzotriazolyl, furanyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of OH, lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl;
R320 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl, thiophenyl, pyrimidyl, each optionally substituted with one or two groups independently selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, halogen, D or CF3;
Figure imgf000094_0001
wherein R3 6 is CH, N, NO;
R327 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d-C3 alkyl, d-C3 haloalkyl, C3- C6 cylcoalkyl, C4-C5 alkylcycloalkyl;
R328 and R329 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, d- C3 alkyl, d-C3 haloalkyl, d-C3 alkoxy, d-C3 haloalkoxy and halogen.
In some embodiments, compounds having the structure of formula 33 have the structure of formula 34
Figure imgf000095_0001
In other embodiments, compounds having structure of formula 33, have the structure of formula 35,
Figure imgf000095_0002
wherein R33 is CH, CD or N;
R330 and R331 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, D, lower alkyl, halogen and CF3;
R3i8.R3i9 is seiecte(i from
Figure imgf000095_0003
R327 is selected from the group consisting of isopropyl, t-butyl and cyclopropyl;
R328 and R329 are independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, d- C3 alkyl, methoxy and trifluoromethoxy;
R334 and R335 are each independently H or D. In some embodiments, at least one of R33' and R335 are D.
In other embodiments for compounds having the formulas 33, 34 or 35, wherein R319 is phenyl;
R320 is optionally substituted phenyl, preferably substituted with one substituent, preferably halogen, or two substituents, preferably both halogen or one halogen one deuterium;
R is CH;
R327 is cycloalkyl; and
R328 and R329 each are halogen.
Exemplary compounds having the structure of formulas 33, 34 or 35 include:
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(-)-3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(+)-3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(3,5-dichloropyridin-4-yl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-(4-((4-(2-(3-carboxyphenyl)cyclopropyl)-3-chlorophenoxy)methyl)-5- cyclopropylisoxazol-3-yl)-3,5-dichloropyridine 1-oxide,
3- (2-(2-chloro-4-((l -(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-4-isopropyl- 1H- 1 ,2,3-triazol-5- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4- ((4-(2-(6-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropyl)-3-chlorophenoxy)methyl)-5- cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazole, 5- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)picolinic acid.
3- (2-(6-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-2- (trifluoromethy)pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
l,3-dihydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)propan-2-aminium 4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3- (2,6- dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoate,
(+)-4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4- ((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(-)-4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
6- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
(+)-6-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid, (-)-6-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-methyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-N-(methylsulfonyl)benzamide,
2-(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzamido)ethanesulfonic acid,
4-((4-(2-(4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-3-chlorophenoxy)methyl)-5- cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazole,
4- (2-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
5- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-isopropyl-lH-pyrazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-l-isopropyl-lH-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-2,6-dimethylbenzoic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(+)-2-(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzamido)ethanesulfonic acid,
4-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-(( 1 S,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(-)-2-(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzamido)ethanesulfonic acid,
2-(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzamido)acetic acid, 4- (2-(2-chloro-4-((4-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)- 1 -isopropyl- 1H- 1 ,2,3-triazol-5- yl)methoxy)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy)-5- fluorophenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d)-5- fluorophenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d2)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d2)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
3- (2-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-isopropylisoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
5- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)picolinic acid,
3-(2-(6-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d)-2- (trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3-yl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid, 4-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
6-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
6-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -methyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-N-(methylsulfonyl)benzamide,
2-(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzamido)ethane- 1 -sulfonic acid,
4-((4-(2-(4-(lH-tetrazol-5-yl)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-3-chlorophenoxy)methyl-d)-5- cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazole,
4- (2-(2-chloro-4-((3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-5-(2-hydroxypropan-2-yl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
5- (2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -isopropyl- 1 H-pyrazole-3 -carboxylic acid,
6-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)- 1 -isopropyl- 1 H-indazole-3-carboxylic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)-2,6-dimethylbenzoic acid,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lR,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid, 4-((lR,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2R)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
4-((lS,2S)-2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)isoxazol-4- yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
(4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoyl)glycine,
4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((4-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)- 1 -isopropyl- 1H- 1 ,2,3-triazol-5-yl)methoxy- d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoic acid,
l,3-dihydroxy-2-(hydroxymethyl)propan-2-aminium 4-(2-(2-chloro-4-((5-cyclopropyl-3- (2,6-dichlorophenyl)isoxazol-4-yl)methoxy-d)phenyl)cyclopropyl)benzoate.
Also provided herein are kits that include any FXR agonist (or composition containing such an agonist) described herein and a device for localized delivery within a region of the intestines, such as the ileum or colon. In certain embodiments, the device is a syringe, bag, or a pressurized container.
IV. Compositions
Also disclosed herein are pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one compound according to any of formulas 1-35, which can be used with embodiments of the method provided herein. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, by E. W. Martin, Mack
Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 15th Edition, 1975, incorporated herein by reference, describes exemplary formulations (and components thereof) suitable for pharmaceutical delivery of the disclosed compounds. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one of the disclosed compounds can be formulated for use in human or veterinary medicine. Particular formulations of a disclosed pharmaceutical composition may depend, for example, on the mode of administration (e.g., oral). In some embodiments, disclosed pharmaceutical compositions include a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier in addition to at least one or two or more active ingredients, such as a compound or compounds disclosed herein. In other embodiments, other medicinal or pharmaceutical agents, for example, with similar, related or complementary effects on the affliction being treated (such as LAD A), can also be included as active ingredients in a pharmaceutical composition. For example, one or more of the disclosed compounds can be formulated with one or more of (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 of) a statin, an insulin sensitizing drug, alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, amylin agonist, dipeptidyl-peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), meglitinide, sulfonylurea, peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)- gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglitazone,
rivoglitazone, or troglitazone], aleglitazar, farglitazar, muraglitazar, or tesaglitazar), a glucagon- like peptide (GLP) agonist, anti-inflammatory agent (e.g., oral corticosteroid), nicotinamide ribonucleoside and analogs thereof that promote NAD+ production of which is a substrate for many enzymatic reactions such as p450s which are a target of FXR (for examples see Yang et ah, J. Med. Chem., 50:6458-61, 2007, herein incorporated by reference) and the like.
Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers useful for the disclosed methods and compositions can depend on the particular mode of administration being employed. For example, for solid compositions (e.g., powder, pill, tablet, or capsule forms), conventional non-toxic solid carriers can include, without limitation, pharmaceutical grades of sugars, such as mannitol or lactose, polysaccharides, such as starch, or salts of organic acids, such as magnesium stearate. In addition to biologically neutral carriers, pharmaceutical compositions can optionally contain amounts of auxiliary substances (e.g., excipients), such as wetting or emulsifying agents, preservatives, and pH buffering agents and the like; for example, sodium acetate or sorbitan monolaurate. Other non-limiting excipients include nonionic solubilizers, such as cremophor, or proteins, such as human serum albumin or plasma preparations. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition includes a sufficient amount of a disclosed compound to have a desired therapeutic effect. Typically, the disclosed compound constitutes greater than 0% to less than 100% of the pharmaceutical composition, such as 10% or less, 20% or less, 30% or less, 40% or less, 50% or less, 60% or less, 70% or less, 80% or less, 90% or less, or 90% to less than 100% of the pharmaceutical composition.
The disclosed pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, N-oxide or combination thereof, of a disclosed compound. Additionally, the pharmaceutical composition may comprise one or more polymorph of the disclosed compound. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are salts of a free base form of a compound that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the free base. These salts may be derived from inorganic or organic acids. Non- limiting examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, hydriodic acid, and phosphoric acid. Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids include acetic acid, propionic acid, glycolic acid, lactic acid, pyruvic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid,
methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, methyl sulfonic acid, salicylic acid, formic acid, trichloroacetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, gluconic acid, asparagic acid, aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, and the like.
Examples of other suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts are found in Remington's
Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th Edition, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 1985.
In some embodiments, compounds disclosed herein according to formulas 1-35 are formulated to have a suitable particle size. A suitable particle size may be one which reduces or substantially precludes separation of the components of the composition, e.g., no separation between the drug and any other components of the composition, such as a second drug, a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, a corticosteroid, an antibiotic or any combination thereof. Additionally, the particle size may be selected to ensure the composition is suitable for delivery, such as oral delivery.
In certain embodiments, the composition further includes an enteric coating. Typically, an enteric coating is a polymer barrier applied to an oral medication to help protect the drug from the acidity and/or enzymes of the stomach, esophagus and/or mouth. In some
embodiments, this coating can reduce or substantially prevent systemic delivery of the disclosed compound, thereby allowing substantially selective delivery to the intestines. In some embodiments, the enteric coating will not dissolve in the acid environment of the stomach, which has an acidic, pH of about 3, but will dissolve in the alkaline environments of the small intestine, with, for example, a pH of about 7 to 9. Materials used for enteric coating include, but are not limited to, fatty acids, waxes, shellac, plastics and plant fibers. In some embodiments, the coating may comprise methyl acrylate-methacrylic acid copolymers, cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose phthalate, hydroxy propyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate (hypromellose acetate succinate), polyvinyl acetate phthalate (PVAP), methyl methacrylate-methacrylic acid copolymers, shellac, cellulose acetate trimellitate, sodium alginate, or any combination thereof. V. Methods of Making the Compounds
A. Methods of Making Compounds Having the Structure of Formulas 1-18
Embodiments of a method of making compounds that have the structure of formulas 1- 18 are also disclosed herein. A general method of making the compounds comprises reacting an aldehyde with a first amine to form an imine, reacting the imine with a reducing agent to form a second amine, and reacting the second amine with an activated carboxylic acid derivative or a carboxylic acid to form an amide.
Other embodiments further comprise contacting the aldehyde with a boronic acid, contacting the amide with a vinyl ester, contacting the first amine with a vinyl ester, contacting the amide with a boronic acid, or any combination thereof. In certain embodiments the reducing agent is a deuterated reducing agent, and the compound comprises deuterium.
One exemplary embodiment of the general method is shown in Scheme 1.
Scheme 1
Vinyl group coupling Reductive amination
Figure imgf000107_0001
A. Vinyl group coupling
With reference to scheme 1, a protected aromatic amine 2 was coupled to a vinyl ester 4 by a suitable coupling technique to form compound 6. The amine of the aromatic amine 2 was protected by a suitable protecting group, as will be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art. Additional information concerning protecting groups is provided by Greene and Wuts,
Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis; 3rd Ed.; John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1999, which is incorporated herein by reference. Exemplary amine protecting groups include, but are not limited to, tert-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), benzyl, benzoyl, or benzoyloxycarbonyl (Cbz). In some embodiments the technique is a Stille coupling. In certain working embodiments, coupling comprised treating the protected aromatic amine with a vinyl group in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as a palladium catalyst, and optionally, a suitable phosphine compound. Suitable palladium catalysts include, but are not limited to, Bis(dibenzylideneacetone)palladium
(Pd2(dba)3) or palladium acetate (Pd(OAc)3). In certain working examples Pd2(dba)3 was used as a catalyst with tri(o-tolyl)phosphine (P(o-tol)3) as the phosphine. The coupling reaction is conducted in any suitable solvent, such as dimethylformamide, at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments the effective temperature is from greater than 0 °C to at least 130 °C, such as from about 20 °C to about 110 °C, from about 80 °C to about 100 °C. In certain working embodiments the temperature was about 95 °C.
B. Reductive amination
The amine protecting group of compound 6 was removed by treatment with a suitable reagent. Suitable de-protection reagents and conditions for a specific protecting group can be selected by a person of ordinary skill in the art, and is further disclosed by consulting Greene and Wuts. In certain working embodiments, trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) was used to remove a Boc protecting group. In certain disclosed embodiments, the de-protected amine (not shown) was then treated with an aldehyde, such as aldehyde 8, in the presence of a reducing agent. In other embodiments, the amine was treated with an aldehyde, and subsequently treated by a reducing agent. The reducing agent is selected to place a desired R4 group into the molecule. In some embodiments R4 is hydrogen; in others it is deuterium. Suitable reducing agents include, but are not limited to, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, sodium triacetoxyborodeuteride, sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium cyanoborodeuteride, sodium borohydride, lithium borohydride, sodium borodeuteride or lithium borodeuteride. Suitable solvents for the reduction include, but are not limited to, toluene, halogenated solvents, THF, hexanes, cyclohexane, acetic acid, deuterated acetic acid, alcohols such as methanol, ethanol propanol, isopropanol, or deuterated alcohols such as methanol-cU. Typically, the reducing agent was NaBH(OAc)3, NaBD(OAc)3, NaBD3CN, NaBH4 or NaBD4 and the solvent was THF, CD3OD, acetic acid or deuterated acetic acid.
C. Acylation
Subsequent to the reductive amination, compound 10 was acylated with acylating agent
12 under suitable conditions, such as by treatment with a carboxylic acid or an activated carboxylic acid derivative, such as an acid chloride, an acid bromide, or an anhydride. A person of ordinary skill in the art will understand which activated carboxylic acid derivatives are suitable for a particular carboxylic acid. Alternatively, a carboxylic acid may be coupled to the amine using a suitable coupling reagent known to a person of ordinary skill in the art.
Exemplary coupling reagents include, but are not limited to, HATU, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCCI, DCC) or l-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (EDC, EDCI, ED AC). In working embodiments the carboxylic acid was activated by forming an acid chloride. The acylation reactions proceed in a suitable solvent, typically an aprotic solvent, such as pyridine, dichloromethane, chloroform, dioxane, toluene, DMF, THF or acetonitrile. Optionally, the reaction with a carboxylic acid or a carboxylic acid derivative may proceed in the presence of one or more additional compounds, such as potassium carbonate, triethylamine,
diisopropylethylamine, sodium carbonate, 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (DMAP) or pyridine. The reactions are performed at a temperature effective to facilitate the reaction, such as from greater than about -10 °C to greater than about 120 °C, typically from about 5 °C to about 90 °C, more typically from about 25 °C to about 65 °C.
D. Boronic acid coupling
After the acylation reaction, compound 14 was treated with a boronic acid 16, in a Suzuki-type coupling. In some embodiments, the coupling was performed in the presence of a catalyst effective to facilitate the coupling reaction, and optionally in the presence of one or more additional compounds. Typical catalysts for a Suzuki coupling are palladium or nickel catalysts, including but not limited to, NiCl2(dppf), NiCl2(dppp), Pd(PPh3)4, Pd(OAC)2 or PdCl2(PPh3)4. In working embodiments the catalyst was Pd(PPh3)4. Typical additional compounds include, but are not limited to, triphenylphosphine (PPh3), and/or bases such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, triethylamine, sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide, tripotassium phosphate or any combination thereof. In certain working embodiments, the additional compound was sodium carbonate. The coupling reaction is performed in any suitable solvent, such as DMF, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol, propanol, benzene, toluene, THF, dioxane, water or any combination thereof. In certain working embodiments, DMF-ethanol-water was used as the solvent.
A person of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that the various steps described above with reference to Scheme 1 do not necessarily have to be performed in the particular order depicted. The reactions can be performed in any order suitable to result in making the desired compound 18. For example, in certain embodiments, the sequence of reactions followed the order described in Scheme 2.
Scheme 2
Boronic acid coupling Reductive amination
Figure imgf000110_0001
With reference to Scheme 2, boronic acid 16 was first coupled to aldehyde 8. The resulting product 20 was then treated with an amine compound 22 in a reductive amination step to form compound 24. Compound 24 was then acylated using acylating reagent 12 to form compound 26, which was then coupled to vinyl ester 4 to form compound 18.
Another variation of Scheme 1 is shown in Scheme 3. In this scheme, the compounds are made using a solid-phase synthetic method as used for the synthesis of fexaramine in U.S. Patent No. 7,647,217, which is incorporated herein by reference. Thus, protected amine 6, where R is hydrogen, is immobilized onto a solid support 34, such as a bead or resin, typically Merrifield resin, through the action of a suitable base, for example, cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate, to make conjugate 36. The reductive amination, acylation and boronic acid coupling steps then proceed on the immobilized compound as described for Scheme 1, making conjugates 38, 40 and 42 respectively. Conjugate 42 is then treated with an alkoxide salt, such as sodium methoxide, to release the desired compound 18 from the solid support. Scheme 3
Figure imgf000111_0001
In certain embodiments, an alternative reaction pathway was followed. Scheme 4 outlines an exemplary alternative route. First, a halogenated nitrobenzene 28 was coupled to vinyl ester 4 in the presence of a suitable catalyst and an additional compound (not shown) to form compound 30. In working embodiments the catalyst was Pd(OAc)2, and the additional compound was sodium acetate. The nitro group of compound 30 was then reduced to an amine by a suitable reagent to form amine 32. Suitable reagents include, but are not limited to, tin chloride, iron powder in an acid medium, zinc powder or catalytic hydrogenation using a transition metal catalyst comprising palladium, platinium, nickel, rhodium or ruthenium. In working embodiments tin chloride (SnCl2) was used as the reducing agent.
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000112_0001
Amine 32 was then treated with an aldehyde 8 in a de-hydration reaction. Suitable dehydrating agents include, but are not limited to, an acid catalyst such as />ara-toluene sulfonic acid, a base such as triethylamine, malononitrile, molecular sieve, magnesium sulfate, sodium sulfate, or any combination thereof. Suitable solvents for the de-hydration reaction include toluene, xylenes, DMSO, DMF, THF, alcohols such as methanol or any combination thereof. Resulting imine compound 34 was then treated with a suitable reducing agent to form amine 10. In working embodiments, a deuterated reducing agent was used. In some embodiments sodium cyanodeuteroborohydride was used, and in others sodium deuteroborohydride was used. Any suitable, non-protonated solvent can be used, and in some working embodiments the solvent was methanol-cU and in others it was THF.
Amine 10 was then treated with acylating reagent 12, as described above with reference to Scheme 1, to form compound 14. In working embodiments the amine was treated with carboxylic acids in the presence of HATU and diisopropylethylamine in DMF. In other working embodiments the amine was treated with carboxylic acid chlorides in dichloromethane in the presence of triethylamine.
I l l Compound 14 was then treated with boronic acid 16 as described above with reference to Scheme 1. In certain working embodiments, compound 14 was treated with boronic acid 16 in a DME-ethanol-water solvent system, in the presence of Pd(PPh3)4 and sodium carbonate. In other working embodiments dioxane- water was used as the solvent, Pd(dppf)Cl2 was the catalyst and potassium carbonate was used as a base.
One exemplary method of making compounds having the structure of formula 13 is shown in Scheme 5. This method is a modification of the method of Lee and Hartwig, J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 3402-3415.
Scheme 5
Figure imgf000113_0001
20 26
With reference to Scheme 5, compound 20 is reacted with a catalyst 22 and a base 24 in a suitable solvent, to form compound 26. Leaving group LG on compound 20 is any suitable leaving group, such as a halide, mesylate, tosylate or trifluoromethylsulfonate. Catalyst 22 is any catalyst that facilitates the formation of compound 26. Suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to, palladium catalysts such as Pd(OAc)2, and may also comprise one or more ligands, such as PCy3, or sterically hindered N-heterocyclic carbine ligands. The amount of the catalyst used is any suitable amount to catalyze the reaction at a suitable rate, such as from about 1 mol% to greater than about 20 mol%, preferably from about 5 mol% to about 10 mol%. Base 24 is any suitable base that facilitates the reaction. In some embodiments an excess of the base is used, such as from greater than 1 equivalent to greater than about 5 equivalents, preferably from about 1.1 equivalents to about 2 equivalents. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, tert- butoxide salts, such as sodium, lithium or potassium tert-butoxide. The solvent can be any solvent suitable to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments the solvent is 1, 4-dioxane.
Embodiments of a method of making prodrugs of compounds having formulas 1-13 are also disclosed herein. One general method of making prodrugs is disclosed by Poon, et al.Bioorg. med. Chem. Lett. 2005, 15: 2259-2263, and is shown in Scheme 6. Briefly, the method comprises making the thioester of the compound, and forming the ortho ester or imidate. Scheme 6
Figure imgf000114_0001
With reference to Scheme 6, ester compound 30 is reacted with reagent suitable to form thioester compound 32. Suitable reagents include, but are not limited to, Lawesson's reagent or P2S5. The reaction is performed in a suitable solvent, usually an aprotic solvent such as toluene, acetonitrile, cyclohexane, dichloromethane, or chloroform. The reaction may also be heated, such as to reflux.
The thioester compound 32 is then reacted with reagents suitable to form the desired prodrug, in the presence of a metal salt and a base. The metal salt is any metal salt suitable to mediate the desulfurization-condensation reaction between the thioester compound 32 and the alcohol or amine. Suitable metal salts include, but are not limited to, silver salts such as AgoTf. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to organic bases such as triethylamine or
diisopropylethylamine. The reactions are performed in solvent suitable to facilitate the reaction, such as an aprotic solvent. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, acetonitrile, DMF, dimethylacetyl, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
To form compound 34, thioester 32 is reacted with dibenzylascorbate, AgOTf and triethylamine in acetonitrile. An intermediate compound is formed initially (not shown) which is then reacted with hydrogen in the presence of a palladium catalyst in alcohol to form compound 34. Compound 36 is formed by reacting compound 32 with hydroxylamine, in the presence of AgOTf and triethylamine in acetonitrile. The intermediate compound (not shown) is then reacted with 2-bromoacetic acid and sodium hydroxide, to form compound 36. Compound 38 is made by reacting compound 32 with serine-OMe in the presence of AgOTf and
triethylamine, in acetonitrile. The intermediate compound formed (not shown) is then reacted with Sodium trimethylsilanolate (NaOTMS) in THF to form compound 38.
A method of making compounds having formulas 17 and 18 is shown in Scheme 7, and is a modification of a method disclosed by Ates and Curran, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 2001, 123: 5130- 5131.
Scheme 7
Figure imgf000115_0001
44 46
With reference to Scheme 7, compound 40 is reacted with a methylating agent, such as methyl trifluoromethanesulfonate, in a suitable solvent to make compound 42. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as dichloromethane and chloroform. Compound 42 is reacted with a metal alkoxide solution, such as sodium methoxide in methanol, to form compound 44, an exemplary compound satisfying formula 17. Compound 44 is further reacted with dimethyl tartrate in a vacuum to form compound 46, an exemplary compound satisfying formula 18.
B. Methods of Making Compounds According to Formulas 19-35
A person of ordinary skill in the art will understand how to make the compounds of formulas 19-35. Additional information concerning the methods for making the disclosed compounds can be found in PCT application publication Nos. WO2003090745, WO2013007387 and WO2011020615, and in the Schemes below.
One exemplary embodiment of a general method of making a compound having the structure of formula 19 is shown in Scheme 8. This method is a modification of the method of Flatt, B. et ah, J. Med. Chem. 2009, 52, 904-907, which is incorporated herein in its entirety. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other suitable methods for making compounds having the structure of formula 19 can be determined. heme 8
Figure imgf000116_0001
With reference to Scheme 8, an indole acetonitrile 51 is treated with a suitable protecting group. Scheme 8 illustrates using di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, in the presence of a base and in a suitable solvent, to form a BOC-protected indole (not shown). Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, aprotic solvents, such as dichloromethane, dichloroethane, THF, chloroform, or combinations thereof. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, 4- dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP), diiospropylethylamine, or combinations thereof. The BOC- protected indole is further reacted with lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (LiHMDS) in a suitable, aprotic solvent such as THF or ether, and at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 52. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from about -100 °C to about -50 °C, such as from about -80 °C to about -60 °C. A suitable alkyl halide is then added to the reaction mixture, and the reaction mixture is warmed, or allowed to warm, to room temperature, such as to from about 20 °C to 25 °C. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the alkyl portion of the alkyl halide will correspond to the desired Ra and/or Rb group. For example, if Ra and/or Rb is methyl, a suitable alkyl halide may be methyl iodide. A person of ordinary skill in the art will also appreciate that if both Ra and Rb are alkyl, then an excess of LiHMDS and alkyl halide are used in the reaction, such as about 2.5 equivalents. However, if only one of Ra or Rb is alkyl, and the other is hydrogen, then only 1 equivalent of LiHMDS and alkyl halide is used. Compound 52 is then deprotected, such as by removal of the BOC group, to form the deprotected indole compound (not shown). Suitable deprotection methods are known to persons of ordinary skill in the art and typically include reacting with an acid or acidic solution, including, but not limited to, trifluoroacetic acid or hydrochloric acid. The cyano group on the deprotected indole compound is then reduced by a suitable reducing agent, such as lithium aluminum hydride (LAH, L1AIH4), at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 53. Suitable solvents for the reduction reaction include any aprotic solvent that will not react with the reducing agent, such as THF and ethers. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 100 °C, such as from about 40 °C to about 80 °C.
Compound 53 is then reacted with a halopyruvate, such as Rc-bromopyruvate, where Rc is the desired ester. The reaction is conducted in the presence of an acid, and in a suitable solvent and at an effective temperature, to form compound 54. Exemplary bromopyruvates include ethyl bromopyruvate and isopropyl bromopyruvate. Suitable acids include aqueous acid such as hydrochloric acid. Suitable solvents include protic solvents, such as alcohols. In some embodiments, ethanol is used as the solvent. Typically, the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 100 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 80 °C.
Compound 54 is then reacted with a base at a temperature effective to form compound 55. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from about 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 110 °C.
Compound 55 is then reacted with a suitable acid or activated acid derivative, such as an acid chloride, to form the desired compound 56. The reaction is conducted in a suitable solvent, and in the presence of a suitable base. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate. The reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
Another exemplary embodiment of a general method of making a compound having the structure of formula 19 is shown in Scheme 9. This method is a modification of the method disclosed by Wang, et al. Tetrahedron Letters, 2011, 52, 3295-3297, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
Scheme 9
Figure imgf000118_0001
With reference to Scheme 9, a pyrroloindoline 57 is reacted with an acetylene ester 58 in a suitable solvent, and at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, to form compound 59. In some embodiments, the reaction is performed under an inert atmosphere, such as nitrogen or argon. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO or acetonitrile. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 0 °C to greater than about 100 °C, such as from about 10 °C to about 50 °C, or about 20 °C to about 30 °C. In some embodiments, the reaction proceeds in the presence of a catalyst. Suitable catalysts include, but are not limited to, copper halides, such as copper iodide, copper bromide, or copper chloride, salts of vitamin C such as sodium salt, potassium salt or lithium salt, or combinations thereof.
With reference to compound 59, Re can be hydrogen or methyl. In embodiments where Re is methyl, compound 59 is demethylated prior to acylation (not shown). The demethylation can be performed by any suitable method such as by reacting the tertiary amine with 1- chloroethylchloroformate in a suitable solvent. Solvents suitable for the demethylation include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as dichloromethane, dichloroethane and chloroform, or THF. The reaction mixture is evaporated and then heated with an alcohol such as methanol for a time effective to form the secondary amine. The effective time is from greater than 1 minute to greater than 1 hour, such as from about 10 minutes to about 30 minutes.
Compound 59, or the demethylated compound 59, is then reacted with a suitable acid or activated acid derivative, such as an acid chloride, to form the desired compound 60. The reaction is conducted in a suitable solvent, and in the presence of a suitable base. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate. The reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
One exemplary embodiment of a method of making a compound having formula 22 is shown in Scheme 10. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other suitable methods for making compounds having the structure of formula 22 can be determined.
Scheme 10
Figure imgf000119_0001
R-acid ^R-isocy 66
63 64
With reference to Scheme 10, a protected diamine 61, such as a BOC-protected diamine, is reacted with an aldehyde 62 in a suitable solvent for from about 10 minutes to greater than 60 minutes, such as from about 20 minutes to about 40 minutes. Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, alcohols, such as methanol or ethanol, water or polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF or DMSO, or combinations thereof. Acid 63 and isocyanide 64 are then added. After an amount of time effective to allow the reaction to proceed, the resulting product is deprotected, such as by adding a suitable acid 65 for removing the BOC protecting group. The effective amount of time is from about 30 minutes to greater than 12 hours, such as from about 1 hour to about 4 hours. Suitable acids are those known to a person of ordinary skill in the art to remove the protecting group, and include, but are not limited to, hydrochloric acid and trifluoroacetic acid. After the addition of the acid, the reaction mixture is left for an amount of time effective to facilitate a reaction to form compound 66, such as from about 6 hours to greater than 24 hours, such as from about 12 hours to about 20 hours.
Typically, the reaction mixture is agitated, such as by stirring or shaking, for at least some of the reaction time, and in some embodiments, for substantially all of the reaction time. The reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction, such as from about 10 °C to greater than about 50 °C, typically from about 20 °C to about 40 °C. Another exemplary method of making a compound having the structure of formula 22 is shown in Scheme 11. The method is a modification of the method disclosed in WO2004087714, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
Scheme 11
Figure imgf000120_0001
With reference to Scheme 11, a haloindole 67, such as a bromo indole, is reacted with an ester compound 67a, which comprises a desired R group and a leaving group LG, to form compound 68. The leaving group can be any suitable leaving group, such as a halide, triflate, mesalate or tosylate. The reaction is performed in the presence of a base, such as sodium hydride, and in a suitable solvent, such as DMF or THF.
Compound 68 is typically saponified to an acid (not shown) by any suitable method known to a person of ordinary skill in the art, such as by reacting the acid with a hydroxide base, or by treatment with an aqueous acid, such as hydrochloric acid. The acid is then typically activated, such as by forming an acid chloride, and then reacted with aniline to form compound 69. The reaction is conducted in a suitable solvent, and in the presence of a suitable base.
Suitable solvents include, but are not limited to, halogenated solvents such as chloroform, dichloroethane and dichloromethane, aprotic solvents such as DMF, DMSO, THF, acetonitrile, pyridine, toluene, or combinations thereof. Suitable bases include, but are not limited to, triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, pyridine, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate or sodium hydrogen carbonate. The reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 100 °C.
Compound 69 is then reacted with a boronic acid (not shown) in a Suzuki-type coupling to form compound 70. In some embodiments, the boronic acid is an aromatic boronic acid. In some embodiments, the coupling is performed in the presence of a catalyst effective to facilitate the coupling reaction, and optionally in the presence of one or more additional compounds. Typical catalysts for a Suzuki coupling are palladium or nickel catalysts, including but not limited to, NiCb(dppf), NiCl2(dppp), Pd(PPh3)4, Pd(OAC)2 or PdCl2(PPh3)4. Typical additional compounds include, but are not limited to, triphenylphosphine (PPh3), and/or bases such as potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, cesium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, triethylamine, sodium ethoxide, sodium methoxide, tripotassium phosphate or any combination thereof. The coupling reaction is performed in any suitable solvent, such as DMF, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol, propanol, benzene, toluene, THF, dioxane, water or any combination thereof.
One exemplary embodiment of a method of making a compound having the structure of formula 25 is shown in Scheme 12. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that other suitable methods for making compounds having the structure of formula 25 can be determined.
Scheme 12
Figure imgf000121_0001
73 74
With reference to Scheme 12, an amine 71 is reacted with an aldehyde 72. The reaction typically is conducted in a suitable solvent, such as an alcohol, such as methanol or ethanol, water, or polar, aprotic solvents such as DMF or DMSO, or combinations thereof, for from about 10 minutes to greater than 60 minutes, such as from about 20 minutes to about 40 minutes. An isocyanide 73 and a suitable azide 74 are then added, and the reaction mixture is left for an amount of time effective to facilitate a reaction to form compound 75, such as from about 6 hours to greater than 48 hours, such as from about 12 hours to about 24 hours. One possible suitable azide is trimethylsilyl azide.
Without being bound to any particular theory, Scheme 13 provides one possible reaction mechanism for the reaction described in Scheme 12. Scheme 13
Figure imgf000122_0001
With reference to Scheme 13, the amine 71 reacts with the aldehyde 72 with the loss of water, to form an imine 76. The imine 76 then reacts with the isocyanide 73 to form an intermediate 77, which then reacts with the azide compound 74, to form an intermediate 78. The intermediate 78 then cyclizes to form the desired compound 75.
Another exemplary embodiment of a method of making a compound having the structure of formula 25 is shown in Scheme 14. The method is a modification of the method disclosed by Chen, et al. Synthesis, 2010, No. 9, 1505-1511, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
Figure imgf000122_0002
With reference to Scheme 14, an aromatic halide compound 80 is reacted with an imidazole compound 81 in the presence of a copper catalyst, such as copper (I) bromide and an additional compound 82 to form compound 83. The reaction is performed in a suitable solvent and in the presence of a suitable base. Suitable solvents include aprotic solvents such as DMSO or DMF. Suitable bases include any base that will facilitate the reaction, such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, lithium carbonate or cesium carbonate. The reaction is conducted at a temperature effective to facilitate a reaction. In some embodiments, the effective temperature is from greater than 20 °C to greater than 120 °C, such as from about 50 °C to about 80 °C.
VI. Embodiments of a Method of Using Farnesoid X Receptor Agonists to Treat or Prevent LADA
In some embodiments, farnesoid X receptor agonists, such as those disclosed herein, as well as compositions including such compounds, are used to treat or prevent LADA. Orally delivered fexaramine (Fex) (Downes et ah, Mol Cell 11 :1079-1092, 2003) is poorly absorbed, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation. It is shown herein that Fex restores pancreatic β cell functions with robustly enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in diabetic mice without body weight changes. It is shown that Fex potentiates bioenergetics to enhance GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells. Concomitantly, Fex increases gene expression of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic β cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in β cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia in ob/ob mice. Furthermore, Fex analogs, including, but not limted to, Fex-D, are more effective at glucose lowering than Fex. The beneficial systemic efficacy achieved with Fex and Fex-D suggests intestinal FXR agonist therapy as an approach in the treatment of LADA.
A. Treatment or Prevention of LADA
In some embodiments, a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists (such as two or more, three or more, four or more, or five or more of the disclosed FXR agonists, such as 2, 3, 4, or 5 of the disclosed FXR agonists) is used in the treatment or prevention of LADA in subjects (for a review see Pipi et ah, World J. Diabetes, 5:505-10, 2014, herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one or more of the FXR agonists disclosed herein is administered to a gastrointestinal (GI) tract of the subject to activate FXR receptors in the intestines, and thereby treat or prevent LADA in the subject. Thus, in some embodiments the FXR agonist(s) is administered to, without limitation, the mouth (such as by injection or by ingestion by the subject), the esophagus, the stomach or the intestines
themselves.
In some embodiments, orally delivered FXR agonists are ineffectively absorbed, resulting in intestinally-restricted FXR activation. In some embodiments, FXR activation is completely limited to the intestine. In some embodiments, administration of one or more FXR agonists does not result in significant activation in the liver or kidney. In other embodiments, some measurable extra-intestinal FXR activation occurs, however the FXR activation is considerably greater in the intestines than in other locations in the body, such as in the liver or kidney. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is minimally absorbed. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is directly administered to the intestines (such as to the distal ileum) of an individual in need thereof. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is directly administered to the colon or the rectum (e.g., using a suppository) of an individual in need thereof. In some embodiments, the FXR agonist is administered orally, and less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, less than 9%, less than 8%, less than 7%, less than 6%, less than 5%, less than 4%, less than 3%, less than 2%, or less than 1% of the FXR agonist is systemically absorbed. For example, systemic absorbion can be measured by determining serum levels of the FXR agonist following its admisntiration, such as at least 30 minutes, at least 1 hour, at least 1.5 hours, at least 2 hours, at least 4 hours, or at least 8 hours following its administration. In some embodiments, the serum concentration of the FXR agonist in the subject remains below the compound's EC50 following administration (such as a level at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, or even at least 50% below the compound's EC50).
In some examples, the method is a method of treating a subject having LADA. Patients with LADA can have hyperglycemia in the context of insulin resistance, but also have some of the immunological and clinical features of insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus, such as no insulin due to breakdown of pancreatic islet cells. Thus, changes in lifestyle (e.g., maintaining a healthy weight, exercising, eating sensibly) are no longer effective for such patients. The disclosed methods provide a treatment option for such patients, as the methods can restore pancreatic β-cell functions with enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS).
In some examples, the subject to be treated has a body mass index (BMI) of 25 of higher
(or may have a normal BMI), a fasting blood glucose of 126 mg/dl or greater (e.g., is hyperglycemic), has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells, produces no insulin, have persistent islet cell antibodies, have high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity, have DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes, show progressive loss of beta cells, adult disease onset, defective glycaemic control, without tendency to ketoacidosis, have low levels of C-peptide, or combinations thereof.
In some examples, the subject to be treated has a BMI of 30 of higher, 35 or higher, or 40 or higher, such as 25-29, 30-34, 35-39, or 40 or more. However, in other examples, the subject to be treated has a normal BMI, such as 16.5 -18.5 or 18.5 to 25. In some examples, the subject to be treated has a fasting blood glucose of at least 150 mg/dl, at least 300 mg/dl, or even at least 500 mg/dl. In some examples, the subject to be treated has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells, such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient (for example as determined by measuring C-peptide or insulin levels). In some examples, the subject to be treated produces no detectable insulin (e.g., serum insulin). In some examples, the subject to be treated has persistent islet cell antibodies, such as islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment), anti-insulin antibodies
(IAA), and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8). Glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD) is a GABA-synthesizing enzyme that has two forms in humans, GAD65 and GAD67. Anti-GAD65 autoantibodies are the most typical connected with ICA reactivity. In some examples, a patient with LAD A has GAD antibody positivity (> 5 RU). In some examples, the subject to be treated has a high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity. In some examples, the subject to be treated has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes. In some examples, the subject to be treated shows progressive loss of beta cells. In some examples, the subject to be treated has adult-onset diabetes (e.g., > 35 years). In some examples, the subject to be treated defective glycaemic control. In some examples, the subject to be treated does not have a tendency to develop ketoacidosis. In some examples, the subject to be treated has low levels of C-peptide. In some examples, the subject to be treated displays, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters.
In some examples, the method is a method of preventing a subject having type II diabetes from developing LAD A, such as a subject having type II diabetes but at risk to develop LAD A. In some examples, a patient is determined to be at risk of developing LADA by measuring or detecting antibodies, such as anti-GAD, anti-IA2, and/or anti-insulin. The disclosed methods provide a preventative/protective option for such patients, as the methods can protect pancreatic β-cells from destruction. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a BMI of 30 of higher, 35 or higher, or 40 or higher, such as 25-29, 30-34, 35-39, or 40 or more. However, in other examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a normal BMI, such as 16.5 -18.5 or 18.5 to 25. In some examples, the subject to be treated has a fasting blood glucose of at least 150 mg/dl, at least 300 mg/dl, or even at least 500 mg/dl. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a decreased number of functioning pancreatic beta cells, such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient (for example a determined by measuring C-peptide and/or insulin levels). In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA produces reduced levels of detectable insulin (e.g., serum insulin), such as a decrease of at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 80%, at least 90%, or at least 95% relative to a non-diabetic (e.g., healthy) patient. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA is insulin resistant. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has persistent islet cell antibodies, such as islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies (such as those against the IA-2 (256-760) fragment), anti-insulin antibodies (IAA), and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8). Glutamic acid decarboxylase (GAD) is a GABA-synthesizing enzyme that has two forms in humans, GAD65 and GAD67. Anti-GAD65 autoantibodies are the most typical connected with ICA reactivity. In some examples, a patient with LADA has GAD antibody positivity (> 5 RU). In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has a high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA shows progressive loss of beta cell. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has adult-onset diabetes (e.g., > 35 years). In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has defective glycaemic control. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA does not have a tendency to develop ketoacidosis. In some examples, the subject having type II diabetes and at risk to develop LADA has low levels of C-peptide. In some examples, the subject to be treated displays, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters.
In some examples, administration of one or more FXR agonists restores pancreatic β cell functions with enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS) in a subject, for example, without significant body weight changes (e.g., no more than a 10% increase or no more than a 5% increase in body weight). In some examples, such methods increase GSIS in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring GSIS are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
The disclosed methods in some examples enhance GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells in a subject (such as a human). GLP-1 is an incretin derived from the transcription product of the pro glucagon gene. The major source of GLP-1 in the body is the intestinal L cell that secretes GLP-1 as a gut hormone. The biologically active forms of GLP-1 include GLP-1 -(7- 37) and GLP-1 -(7-36)NH2 (HAEGTFTSDVSSYLEGQAAKEFIAWLVKGR; SEQ ID NO: 1) in humans, which result from selective cleavage of the proglucagon molecule. GLP-2 is a 33 amino acid peptide (HADGSFSDEMNTILDNLAARDFINWLIQTKITD; SEQ ID NO: 2) in humans. GLP-2 is created by specific post-translational proteolytic cleavage of proglucagon in a process that also liberates GLP-1. GLP agonists are "incretin mimetics" that can be used to treat type 2 diabetes. Examples include, but are not limited to: exenatide (Byetta/Bydureon), liraglutide (Victoza), lixisenatide (Lyxumia), and albiglutide (Tanzeum). In certain
embodiments, the FXR agonist enhances the secretion of glucagon-like peptide- 1 (GLP-1) and/or glucagon-like peptide-2 (GLP-2). In some examples, such methods increase GLP-1 secretion in enteroendocrine L cells in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring GLP-1 secretion are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
In some examples, administration of one or more FXR agonists increases the respiratory capacity (e.g., mitochondrial bioenergetics) in an intestinal L cell. In some examples, such methods increase respiratory capacity in an intestinal L cell by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a cell not treated with the disclosed therapies.
The disclosed methods in some examples increase gene expression of glucagon-like peptide- 1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic β cells, resulting in restoration of GSIS in β cells to ameliorate hyperglycemia. In some examples, such methods increase GLP-1R in pancreatic β cells in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30% or even at least 50% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring gene expression (such as expression of GLP-1R) are known (e.g., detection of GLP-1R proteins and/or nucleic acids), and exemplary methods are provided herein. The disclosed methods in some examples decrease the amount of serum insulin in the subject. Serum levels of insulin are decreased when blood glucose levels are lowered and insulin sensitivity is also increased. Thus, in some examples, the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum insulin in a subject (such as a human). In some examples, such methods decrease serum insulin in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring serum insulin are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
The disclosed methods in some examples decrease the amount of serum glucose in the subject. Thus, in some examples, the disclosed methods decrease the amount of serum glucose in a subject (such as a human). In some examples, such methods decrease serum glucose in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring serum glucose are known, and exemplary methods are provided herein.
The disclosed methods in some examples decrease the amount of one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage, such as thioredoxin-interacting protein (Txnip) and inflammatory markers usch as interleukin 1, in the subject. Txnip is a marker of pancreatic beta cell damage (OMEVI 606599), and sequences are publicly available (e.g., GenBank Accession Nos.
NP_006463.3, AAH93704.1, NP OO 1009935.1, NM_006472.4 and NM_001009935.2). Thus, in some examples, the disclosed methods decrease the amount of one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage (e.g., Txnip) in a subject (such as a human). In some examples, such methods decrease one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage, such as Txnip, in the subject by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 50% or even at least 75% (such as 5% to 50%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 70%, or 10% to 30%), for example relative to levels observed in a subject not treated with the disclosed therapies. Methods of measuring such proteins are known (e.g., at the protein or nucleic acid level), and exemplary methods are provided herein.
In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are co-administered with one or more additional compounds or therapies, for treatment or prevention of a metabolic disorder. For example, one or more FXR agonists can be administered with an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, a GLP agonist, a DPP-4 inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), a catecholamine (such as epinephrine, norepinephrine, or dopamine), peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglitazone, rivoglitazone, or troglitazone], aleglitazar, farglitazar, muraglitazar, or tesaglitazar) or a combination thereof. Likewise, one or more FXR agonists can be administered with a statin, HMG-CoA reductase inhibitor, fish oil, fibrate, niacin or other treatment for dyslipidemia. In one example, the one or more FXR agonists can be administered with nicotinamide ribonucleoside and analogs thereof that promote NAD+ production of which is a substrate for many enzymatic reactions such as p450s which are a target of FXR (for examples see Yang et ah, J. Med. Chem., 50:6458-61, 2007, herein incorporated by reference).
In some examples, the method also includes performing clinical assays on the subject to be administered the one or more FXR agonists. For example, the method can also include determining if the subject produces insulin (for example by measuring serum insulin);
measuring the subject's BMI; measuring/determining the subject's blood glucose levels (such as while fasting); measuring/determining a level of C-peptide in the subject;
measuring/determining a level of islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GAD A), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies, anti-insulin antibodies (IAA), and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8) in the subject; or combinations thereof; measuring/detecting functional pancreatic beta cells (e.g., measured by detecting C-peptide); measuring/detecting frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity; determining if the subject has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes; and/or determining if the subject has a tendency to ketoacidosis. Such methods are routine, and exemplary methods are provided herein. For example, methods of detecting antibodies and proteins are routine, such as immunoassay, such as ELISA or RIA, microscopy, spectroscopy, and the like. In some examples, at least 2, at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, such as 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or all of such clinical parameters are measured.
In some examples, the method includes selecting a subject having or at risk for developing LADA for administration of one or more FXR agonists.
B. Administration
The particular mode of administration and the dosage regimen can be selected by the attending clinician, taking into account the particulars of the case (e.g. the subject, the disease, the disease state involved, the particular treatment, and whether the treatment is prophylactic). Treatment can involve daily or multi-daily or less than daily (such as weekly or monthly etc.) doses over a period of a few days to months, or even years. For example, a therapeutically effective amount of one or more FXR agonists can be administered in a single dose, twice daily, weekly, or in several doses, for example daily, or during a course of treatment. In a particular non-limiting example, treatment involves once daily dose or twice daily dose.
In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered orally. In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered as an ileal-pH sensitive release formulation that delivers the compound to the intestines, such as to the ileum of an individual. In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered as an enterically coated formulation. In some embodiments, oral delivery of one or more FXR agonists provided herein can include formulations, as are well known in the art, to provide prolonged or sustained delivery of the drug to the gastrointestinal tract by any number of mechanisms. These include, but are not limited to, pH sensitive release from the dosage form based on the changing pH of the small intestine, slow erosion of a tablet or capsule, retention in the stomach based on the physical properties of the formulation, bioadhesion of the dosage form to the mucosal lining of the intestinal tract, or enzymatic release of the active drug from the dosage form. The intended effect is to extend the time period over which the active drug molecule is delivered to the site of action (e.g., the intestines) by manipulation of the dosage form. Thus, enteric-coated and enteric-coated controlled release formulations are within the scope of the present disclosure. Suitable enteric coatings include cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinylacetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate and anionic polymers of methacrylic acid and methacrylic acid methyl ester.
In some embodiments, one or more FXR agonists are administered before ingestion of food, such as at least 10 minutes, at least 15 minutes, at least 20 minutes, or at least 30 minutes before ingestion of food (such as 10-60 minutes or 10-30 minutes before ingesting food). In some embodiments of the methods described herein, one or more FXR agonists are administered less than about 60 minutes before ingestion of food. In some embodiments of the methods described above, one or more FXR agonists are administered less than about 30 minutes before ingestion of food. In some embodiments of the methods described herein, one or more FXR agonists are administered after ingestion of food. In some embodiments, the methods further include administration of an insulin sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha- glucosidase inhibitor, a GLP agonist, a DPP-4 inhibitor (such as sitagliptin, vildagliptin, saxagliptin, linagliptin, anaglptin, teneligliptin, alogliptin, gemiglptin, or dutoglpitin), a catecholamine (such as epinephrine, norepinephrine, or dopamine), peroxisome proliferator- activated receptor (PPAR)-gamma agonist (e.g., a thiazolidinedione (TZD) [such as ioglitazone, rosiglitazone, rivoglitazone, or troglitazone], aleglitazar, farglitazar, muraglitazar, or
tesaglitazar), a TGR5 agonist, a biguanide, or a combination thereof.
A FXR agonist containing composition administered can include at least one of a spreading agent or a wetting agent. In some embodiments, the absorption inhibitor is a mucoadhesive agent (e.g., a mucoadhesive polymer). In some embodiments, the mucoadhesive agent is selected from methyl cellulose, polycarbophil, polyvinylpyrrolidone, sodium
carboxymethyl cellulose, and a combination thereof. In some embodiments, a pharmaceutical composition administered further includes an enteroendocrine peptide and/or an agent that enhances secretion or activity of an enteroendocrine peptide.
The pharmaceutical compositions that comprise one or more compounds disclosed herein can be formulated in unit dosage form, suitable for individual administration of precise dosages. In one non-limiting example, a unit dosage contains from about 1 mg to about 50 g of one or more compounds disclosed herein, such as about 10 mg to about 10 g, about 100 mg to about 10 g, about 100 mg to about 1 g, about 500 mg to about 5 g, or about 500 mg to about 1 g. In other examples, a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds disclosed herein is from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, for example, about 0.5 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg, about 5 mg/kg to about 250 mg/kg, or about 50 mg/kg to about 100 mg/kg, such as at least 1 mg/kg, at least 10 mg/kg, at least 25 mg/kg, at least 50 mg/kg, or at least 100 mg/kg. In other examples, a therapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds disclosed herein is from about 50 mg/kg to about 250 mg/kg, for example about 100 mg/kg.
In some examples, the FXR agonist is effective faster and/or at a lower dose than Fex. For example, it is shown herein that Fex-D is effective at lowering blood glucose with half the dose in half the time (50 mg/kg for 2 weeks), as compared to Fex (100 mg/kg for 4 weeks). Thus, in some examples, the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% less, at least 30%, less, at least 40% less, or at least 50% less than Fex. In some examples, the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% faster, at least 30%, faster, at least 40% faster, or at least 50% faster than Fex. In some examples, the FXR agonist used is effective at a dose at least 20% faster, at least 30%, faster, at least 40% faster, or at least 50% faster than Fex and is effective at a dose at least 20% less, at least 30%, less, at least 40% less, or at least 50% less than Fex. Example 1
Materials & Methods
A. Animals and animal care
Leptin-deficient ob/ob mice were purchased from Jackson laboratory (stock no. 000632). Each mouse consumed 100 mg per kg of body weight Fex (in corn oil) per day by oral gavage for 5 weeks. For in vivo analog study, each mouse consumed 50mg per kg of body weight Fex-D (in corn oil) per day by oral gavage for 14 days. For GLP-1 receptor antagonist study, each mouse was daily treated with 100 μg per kg of body weight Exendin 9-39 amide (Abeam) via intraperitoneal injection for 2 weeks. For INT- 777 study, each mouse was daily gavaged with 60 mg per kg of body weight ΓΝΤ-777 (in corn oil) for 5 weeks. For FGF15 study, each mouse was daily treated with 0.25 mg per kg of body weight FGF15 (in PBS with 0.1% BSA) via intravenous injection for 2 weeks. The sample sizes for all animal studies are indicated in each figure legend. All mice were housed in a specific pathogen-free facility with a 12-h light, 12-h dark cycle and given free access to food and water. All in vivo data were retrieved from 3 independent experimental animal cohorts. Core body temperature was measured with a clinical rectal thermometer (Thermalert model TH-5; Physitemp). For GTTs, 6-h fasted mice received 2 g of glucose per kg of body weight by oral gavage. Human insulin (Humilin, Eli Lilly) was used for insulin sensitivity test. Tail blood was drawn at indicated time intervals, and blood glucose level was measured with a One Touch Ultra glucometer (LifeScan). Body composition was measured with Echo MRI-100 body composition analyzer (Echo Medical Systems). All mice were randomly assigned to experimental groups for further analysis. No samples were excluded from the analysis.
Figure imgf000132_0001
B. In vivo metabolic phenotype analysis
Real-time metabolic analyses were conducted in a Comprehensive Lab Animal
Monitoring System (Columbus Instruments). C02 production, 02 consumption, RQ (relative rates of carbohydrate versus fat oxidation) and ambulatory counts were determined for 4 consecutive days and nights, with at least 24-h for adaptation before data recording.
C. Isolated pancreatic islet studies
Mouse pancreatic islets were isolated from ob/ob mice according to a method used for rats traditionally. Briefly, 0.5 mg/ml collagenase P (Roche) diluted in HBSS buffer was injected through the common bile duct and the perfused pancreas was dissected and incubated in water bath with 37°C for 21 minutes. Digested exocrine cells and intact islets were separated using Histopaque-1077 (SIGMA) with centrifugation by 900g for 15 minutes and intact islets were picked up manually.
D. Insulin secretion assay (primary mouse pancreatic islet and human islets) Insulin release from intact islets was monitored using batch incubation methods. Isolated pancreatic islets were cultured over-night with RPMI1940 supplemented with 10% (v/v) fetal bovine serum and 1% (v/v) Antibiotics-antimycotic solution, were pre-cultured at 37°C for 30 minutes in Krebs Ringer bicarbonate buffer (KRBH) containing 129.4 mM NaCl, 3.7 mM KCl, 2.7 mM CaCl2, 1.3 mM KH2P04, 1.3 mM MgS04, 24.8 mM NaHC03 (equilibrated with 5 % C02, 95 % 02, pH7.4), lOmM HEPES and 0.2 % (v/v) BSA (fraction V) with 3mM glucose. N ext, the pancreatic islets were incubated for 30 minutes KRBH buffer (500μ1/10 islets) with 3 mM or 20 mM glucose with or without 100 nM Exendin-4 to determine insulin secretion levels. At the end of the incubation period, islets were pelleted by centrifugation, and aliquots of the buffer were sampled. The amounts of insulin were determined by Rat/mouse Insulin ELISA KIT (Millipore) for mice islets.
E. GLP-1 secretion assay
In vitro GLP-1 secretion assay was performed in human enteroendocrinal L cells (NCI-
H716). For each secretion assay, cells were seeded at lxlO5 cells/ml (1 ml/well) in a matrigel- coated 24- well plate. Prior to GLP-1 secretion assay, cells were pre-treated with DMSO, 1 μΜ
Fex, or 1 μΜ Fex-D overnight. Cells were deprived in Krebs buffer (with 0.1% BSA) with dipeptidyl peptidase (DPP)-4 inhibitor (ΙΟΟμΜ sitagliptin). GLP-1 was measured with a commercial kit (EZGLP1T-36K, Millipore). For in vivo GLP-1 secretion, each animal was gavaged with 25 mg per kg of body weight sitagliptin 60-minutes before glucose load. Blood was collected from the tail vein at the indicated intervals, and transferred to serum collection tubes containing sitagliptin.
F. Extracellular oxygen consumption rate assay
Briefly, NCI-H716 cells were seeded in XF 96- well cell culture microplates (Seahorse Bioscience) at 6.0 x 104 cells per well in 150 μΐ of growth medium and then incubated at 37°C/5% C02 for 24 hr. A Seahorse Bioscience instrument model XF96 was used to measure the rate of change of dissolved oxygen in the media surrounding the cells. All procedures followed manufacturer's instructions.
G. RNA-Seq library generation
Total RNA was isolated from cell pellets treated with RNAlater using the RNA mini kit
(Qiagen) and treated with DNasel (Qiagen) for 30 minutes at room temperature. Sequencing libraries were prepared from 100-500ng total RNA using the TruSeq RNA Sample Preparation Kit v2 (Illumina) according to the manufacturer's protocol. Briefly, mRNA was purified, fragmented, and used for first-, then second-strand cDNA synthesis followed by adenylation of 3' ends. Samples were ligated to unique adapters and subjected to PCR amplification.
Mulitplexed libraries were then validated using the 2100 Bio Analyzer (Agilent), normalized, and pooled for sequencing. RNA-Seq libraries prepared from two biological replicates for each experimental condition were sequenced on the Illumina HiSeq 2500 using bar-coded
multiplexing and a 100 bp read length.
H. High-throughput sequencing and analysis
Image analysis and base calling were performed with Illumina CASAVA-1.8.2. This yielded a median of 29.9M usable reads per sample. Short read sequences were mapped to a
UCSC mm9 reference sequence using the RNA-seq aligner STAR. Known splice junctions from mm9 were supplied to the aligner and de novo junction discovery was also
permitted. Differential gene expression analysis, statistical testing and annotation were performed using Cuffdiff 2. Transcript expression was calculated as gene-level relative abundance in fragments per kilobase of exon model per million mapped fragments and employed correction for transcript abundance bias. RNA-Seq results for genes of interest were also explored visually using the UCSC Genome Browser.
Example 2
Fex improves glucose homeostasis in ob/ob mice
To investigate the effect of Fex treatment in a diabetic mouse model, leptin-deficient obese mice (ob/ob) were subjected to daily treatment by oral gavage (lOOmg/kg) for 5 weeks. Fex increases energy expenditure to exhibit a reduction in weight gain in diet-induce obese (DIO) mice. Consistently, Fex-treated ob/ob mice exhibited an increase in core temperature (FIG. 1 A). Gene expression analysis confirmed the induction of UCP1 as well as a number of genes involved in β-oxidation, thermogenesis and oxidative phosphorylation (FIG. IB- ID).
In marked contrast, Fex-treated ob/ob mice did not exhibit any changes of body weight gain (FIG. 2A) or lean/fat mass (FIG. 2B). While no difference was observed in the tissue weights of liver and inguinal fat (iWAT), gonadal fat (gWAT) was modestly but significantly reduced by Fex treatment (FIG. 2C). Consistent with reduced adiposity, the gene expression of inflammatory cytokines and chemokines were decreased in gWAT (FIG. 3 A and 3B).
Furthermore, Fex treatment changed the relative proportions of immune cells in adipose tissues, most notably increasing the proportion of M2 macrophages in gWAT, indicating that Fex treatment suppressed inflammation in visceral adipose tissues (FIGS. 3A-3C).
Reduction of inflammation in visceral fat improves glucose homeostasis, and thus the physiological effects of Fex on glucose homeostasis were examined in ob/ob mice. Fex-treated mice exhibited significant improvements in their endocrine and metabolic profiles including reduced glucose and insulin levels (FIG. 2D and 2E). Furthermore, Fex treatment improved glucose tolerance and insulin sensitivity in ob/ob mice (FIGS. 2F and 2G). Transcriptomic analysis from skeletal muscle showed that gene involved in insulin signaling and mitochondrion were largely increased (FIGS. 4A-4D) whereas hepatic gluconeogenesis/lipogenesis were remarkably suppressed by Fex treatment (FIG. 2H and FIGS. 5A-5C). Notably, Fex-treated mice exhibited increased respiratory exchange ratio in the dark period (FIGS. 6A-6D).
Given that mice have nocturnal feeding behavior, these data indicate that Fex-treated ob/ob mice increased glucose uptake to utilize more glucose as an energy source in response to feeding. To confirm that Fex treatment improved glucose homeostasis, blood glucose levels were monitored for 4 weeks after Fex treatment was stopped. Serum glucose levels remained low for 3 weeks after cessation of treatment, and then gradually increased (FIG. 21). These data demonstrate a marked improvement in glucose homeostasis upon Fex treatment in ob/ob mice.
Example 3
Fex potentiates bioenergetics in enteroendocrinal L cells
to enhance GLP-1 secretion
Classical FXR target genes SHP and FGF15 were markedly upregulated in the intestine upon Fex treatment (FIG. 7A). RNA-Seq of intestinal tissues was used to determine the mechanisms through which Fex contributes to systemic changes leading to improvements of glucose homeostasis. In addition to established FXR target genes, the induction of genes involved in mitochondrion was noted, potentially identifying additional FXR regulated genes (FIG. 7B). The induction of genes involved in mitochondrion is of particular interest because bioenergetics are important for the secretion of incretins such as glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP- 1) in enteroendocrinal L cells.
To demonstrate that Fex treatment has direct and positive effects on overall
mitochondrial bioenergetics, the respiration of enteroendocrinal L cells treated with Fex or DMSO was determined on Seahorse XF96 analyzer (Seahorse Bioscience, North Billerica, MA). Gene expression analysis showed that functional FXR is robustly expressed in enteroendocrinal L cells, as indicated by the induction of SHP expression with Fex treatment (FIG. 8). While the basal respiratory rates were similar between treated cells, the maximum respiration rate induced by FCCP was 155% in the Fex-treated L cells (compared to 130% in the vehicle-treated L cells), indicating that transient Fex treatment led to increased respiratory capacity in intestinal L cells (FIG. 7C). Conversely, treatment with the FXR antagonist guggulsterone reduced basal respiratory rates and the FCCP-induced maximum respiration rate (FIG. 9 A and 9B).
To further examine how this increase in respiratory capacity affects L cell bioenergetics, the maintenance of ATP levels under energetic demanding conditions was evaluated. Human intestinal L cells treated with DMSO or Fex were incubated with the muscarinic receptor agonist bethanechol chloride and residual ATP levels determined. Fex treatment increased the residual ATP levels, consistent with the observed increase in respiratory capacity. Fex-treated L cells were able to maintain 83% of the initial ATP abundance whereas DMSO-treated L cells were able to maintain 67% (FIG. 7D). Thus, Fex enhances overall mitochondrial bioenergetics in enteroendocrinal L cells. As glucose-stimulated GLP-1 secretion is an energy intensive process, and Fex enhances the energetic capacity of L cells, it was investigated whether Fex treatment could enhances GLP- 1 secretion. While Fex treatment had no effect on proglucagon or DPP4 expression, the transcripts encoding the GLP-1 percursor and the peptidase degrading GLP-1, respectively (FIG. 8), L cells pretreated with Fex showed a significant increase in GLP-1 secretion in response to a glucose challenge (Fig 7E). Similarly, treatment with INT-777, a synthetic TGR5 agonist, increased GLP-1 secretion (FIG. 7E).
To investigate whether Fex enhances GLP-1 secretion in vivo, mice were challenged with a DPP4 inhibitor, sitagliptin (25mg/kg) prior to a glucose challenge. Fex-treated ob/ob mice displayed an increase of plasma GLP-1 level 20 minutes after the glucose challege, and improved glucose tolerance (FIGS. 7F and 7G). These results indicate that Fex potentiates the bioenergetics in enteroendocrinal L cells to enhance GLP-1 secretion in response to a glucose challenge. Example 4
Fex restores pancreatic β cell functions to secrete insulin
in response to glucose in ob/ob mice
Insulin resistance can be associated with reduced β cell insulin secretion in response to glucose, while GLP-1 augments glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS). To examine whether Fex treatment improves GSIS, serum insulin levels were determined after a glucose challenge in ob/ob mice. A significant increase in serum insulin was observed in Fex-treated ob/ob mice (FIG. 10A). In addition, the insulin content was significantly higher in ex vivo islets from Fex-treated mice (FIG. 10B). Furthermore, ex vivo insulin secretion was dramatically increased in response to 20 mM glucose (FIG. 10D). The presence of a GLP-1 agonist,
Exendin-4 (Ex-4) further potentiated insulin secretion (FIG. 10D), indicating that Fex is sufficient to enhance GSIS in pancreatic β cells from diabetic mice. Consistent with the higher insulin content, histological analysis showed that islet are larger in Fex-treated ob/ob mice (FIG. 10D). A comparison of the transcriptional changes clearly showed that Fex increased gene expressions involved in cAMP signaling/insulin secretion and wound healing pathway whereas it suppressed expression of genes involved in the apoptotic pathway, indicating that Fex improves pancreatic β cell physiology in ob/ob mice (FIG. 10E). Notably, the expression of the GLP-1 receptor was increased in Fex treated islets, potentially contributing to their increased glucose sensitivity (FIG. 10E). Previously, it has been reported that increased gene expression of GLP-1 receptor has been shown to enhance GLP-1 signaling in pancreatic β cells and improve insulin secretion in response to glucose. Thus, it was determined whether Fex potentiates GLP-1 signaling in islets to improve pancreatic β cell physiology in ob/ob mice. Fex-treated ob/ob mice were subjected to co-treatment with Exendin-9 (Ex-9), a GLP-1 receptor antagonist, for 2 weeks. Notably, the Fex-induced reduction in serum glucose was largely attenuated by Ex-9 co-treatment (FIG. 11). Furthermore, glucose stimulated insulin secretion was significantly impaired by Ex-9 treatment (FIG. 10F).
These results indicate that Fex treatment improves glucose homeostasis, at least in part, through enhancing the GLP-1 pathway.
Example 5
New Fex analog is more potent in improving
pancreatic β cell functions in ob/ob mice
To find more efficacious FXR agonists, Fex was synthesized with a selective deuteration (Fex-D) proposed to reduce degradation by endogenous cytochrome P450 enzymes (FIG. 12A). Fex and Fex-D exhibited similar low in vitro permeability in human intestinal epithelial Caco2 cells during a 2 hour incubation. (Table 1).
Table 1 : FEX analogues show low permeability in intestinal epithelial cells
Figure imgf000139_0001
Permeability Ranking: lower is < lxlO"6 cm/s; higher is > lxlO"6 cm/s.
An efflux ratio >2 indicates potential for the compound to be a substrate for Pgp or other active transporter.
Orally-administered Fex-D significantly induced FXR target genes in intestine but not in the liver, consistent with it retaining intestinally-restricted activity (FIG. 13D). To compare the efficacies of Fex and Fex-D, ob/ob mice were treated with Fex (100 mg/kg/day) or Fex-D (at a reduced 50 mg/kg/day dose) for 2 weeks (FIG. 12B). Neither Fex nor Fex-D treatment led to any changes in body weight compared to vehicle treatment (FIG. 13 A). While the reduced Fex treatment duration (2 weeks) had little effect, Fex-D treatment significantly reduced fasting glucose levels (FIG. 12C), and was accompanied by increased thermogenesis (FIG. 13B). Fex- D treated mice displayed dramatically improved glucose homeostasis, as seen in their glucose tolerance tests and in their reduced fasting insulin levels (FIGS. 12D and 12E). Furthermore, insulin secretion in response to a glucose challenge was significantly improved over Fex treatment (FIG. 12E), indicating that Fex-D is efficient in potentiating beneficial effects at a low dosage. Consistent with Fex-D treatment potentiated the metabolic capacity of enteroendocnnal L cells compared to Fex, Fex-D treatment enhanced GLP-1 secretion in ob/ob mice in response to glucose (FIG. 12F and FIG. 13C).
Next, primary islets were isolated from mice treated by Fex-D to compare gene expression changes. Strikingly, the two treatment regimes; Fex (100 mg/kg for 5 weeks) and Fex-D (50 mg/kg for 2 weeks), induced similar transcriptional changes in islets from ob/ob mice, including increased expression of the GLP-1 receptor and downstream genes (FIGS. 12G and 12H, Table 2). Intersetingly, FGF15 injection upregulated reg family gene expression, but not GLP-1 receptor signaling (FIGS. 12G and 12H, Table 2) indicating that Fex and Fex-D enhance GLP-1 signaling in pancreatic β cells to improve cellular function in response to glucose in diabetic mice, which is independent with FGF15 signaling. Interestingly, the transcriptional changes induced in islets in vivo by intestional specific FXR activation (Fex and Fex-D) were not observed ex vivo (direct treatment of isolated islets with Fex, XL335, mFgfl5 or hFgfl9, FIG. 12G, Table 2). Furthermore, the expression of Txnip, a damage marker for pancreatic β cells, was dramatically reduced by Fex-D treatment, indicating that Fex-D treatment is efficient in restoring pancreatic β cell physiology in ob/ob diabetic mice (FIG. 12G) and reg families which is involved in beta cell regeneration (Table 3).
Table 2: Top 10 genes upregulated by Fex or Fex analogs
Figure imgf000141_0001
Table 3: Top 10 genes downregulated by Fex or Fex analogs
Figure imgf000142_0001
Discussion
The results above demonstrate that intestinal FXR agonism is sufficient to improve glucose homeostasis and insulin resistance without significantly affecting body weight in a diabetic mouse model. Consistent with previous reports, Fex also enhances thermogenesis in BAT and reduces visceral adipose tissue inflammation in ob/ob mice. The improvements in glucose homeostasis appear to be mediated by an increase of GLP-1 secretion from
enteroendocrinal L cells in response to glucose, leading to physiological improvements in pancreatic β cells and enhanced glucose-stimulated insulin secretion. These observations indicate that Fex potentiates the bioenergetics of enteroendocrinal L cells to increase GLP-1 secretion. Furthermore, Fex-D also exhibits similar physiological benefits, including enhanced GLP-1 secretion, indicating that intestinal FXR agonism potentiates bioenergetics to stimulate incretin secretion in enteroendocrinal L cells to ameliorate systemic glucose homeostasis.
Fex treatment has been shown to change the relative composition of circulating bile acids. A reduction in hepatic CYP7A1 accompanied by an increase in CYP7B1 expression shifts BA synthesis away from cholic acid towards chenodeoxyholic acid derivatives, most notably lithocholic acid, the most potent endogenous ligand for the G protein-coupled bile acid receptor TGR5. While it was previously reported that Fex does not activate TGR5, the pronounced changes in bile acid composition suggests that the TGR5 pathway may contribute to the observed physiological beneficial effects. The activation of TGR5 by a selective agonist INT-777 has been reported to stimulate the production and secretion of GLP-1 in
enteroendocrinal L cells, leading to improvements in insulin secretion from pancreatic β cells. Notably, both treatments exhibited improvements in glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (FIG. 14F). Transcriptomic analysis of islets from Fex- or INT-777- treated ob/ob mice demonstrated a remarkably similar pattern of gene expression changes, including genes involved in cAMP- mediated signaling, oxidation/reduction and insulin secretion (FIGS. 15A-15C). Concomitantly, the expression of the GLP-1 receptor in islets was significantly increased by both Fex and INT- 777 treatment (FIGS. 15A-15C), indicating that both Fex and INT-777 treatment enhance GLP- 1 mediated signaling in pancreatic islets to stimulate insulin secretion in ob/ob mice.
The systemic metabolic improvements induced in ob/ob mice by Fex treatment may be attributed in part, to the increase in FGF15 signaling. FGF15 has been shown to increase metabolic rate and improve glucose and lipid homeostasis without changes in food intake.
However, the physiological impacts of FGF15 on pancreatic beta cells remain unclear. FGF15 treatment significantly reduced blood glucose levels as well as glucose sensitivity (as measured by glucose tolerance tests) without affecting glucose uptake in the skeletal muscle (FIGS. 16A- 16D). Transcriptomic analyses of islets from vehicle- or FGF15-treated ob/ob mice establishes that FGF15 participates, at least partially, in the Fex-mediated improvements of pancreatic β cells in ob/ob mice (FIGS. 17A-17F).
These results uncover a new therapeutic avenue to manipulate GLP-1 signaling through intestinal activation of the nuclear receptor FXR. Though hypoglycemia has been rarely reported, an increased risk of pancreatitis or pancreatic cancer has been reported in patients treated with GLP-1 mimetic therapy. While GLP-1 mimetic therapy increases endogenous GLP-1 levels, Fex does not increase endogenous GLP-1 levels in a fasted-state. Instead, Fex potentiates GLP-1 secretion from enteroendocrinal L cells in response to glucose, and minimizes the chronic elevation of GLP-1 levels to reduce systemic activation of GLP-1 signaling. Taken together, these results indicate that intestinal FXR activation is a novel therapeutic strategy to treat LADA.
Example 6
Administration of fexaramine and guggulsterone
Glucagon- like peptide 1 (GLP-1) is a gut-derived peptide secreted by intestinal L cells after a meal, where it functions to potentiate glucose-stimulated insulin secretion, enhance β-cell growth and survival, and inhibit gastric emptying and food intake. The demonstrated glucose- lowering effects of GLP-1 have lead to the approval of GLP-1 receptor agonists for the treatment of Type 2 diabetes. However, GLP-1 secretion is reduced in patients with type 2 diabetes, leading to interest in GLP-1 secretagogues as alternative therapies.
To examine the effects of FXR activity on the secretion of GLP-1, the metabolic changes induced in human L cells was measured after treatment with the FXR agonist, fexaramine and an FXR antagonist, guggulsterone. Treatment of L cells with fexaramine (1 μΜ for 24 hours) lead to an increase in the oxygen consumption rate (OCR), consistent with increased
mitochondrial activity and consequently, an increased energetic state (FIG. 9A). The reverse effect was seen after treatment with the FXR antagonist, guggulsterone, with lower OCR after drug treatment. The ability of fexaramine to increase the energetic state of the L cells indicates that it can function as a GLP-1 secretagogue.
As shown in FIG. 18, fexaramine and the deuterated analogs induce a common set of genes in islets that are involved in intracellular signaling, insulin secretion, and regulation of exocytosis.
In view of the many possible embodiments to which the principles of the disclosure may be applied, it should be recognized that the illustrated embodiments are only examples of the disclosure and should not be taken as limiting the scope of the invention. Rather, the scope of the invention is defined by the following claims. We therefore claim as our invention all that comes within the scope and spirit of these claims.

Claims

We claim:
1. A method of treating or preventing latent autoimmune diabetes of adults (LAD A) in a subject, comprising administering to a gastrointestinal tract of the subject a therapeutically effective amount of one or more farnesoid X receptor (FXR) agonists, thereby activating FXR receptors in the intestine of the subject.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is minimally absorbed systemically.
3. The method of claim 1 or 2, wherein the method substantially restores pancreatic beta cell function in the subject, increases glucose-stimulated insulin secretion (GSIS), increases glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP1) secretion in enteroendrocrine L cells of the subject, increases expression of glucagon-like peptide- 1 receptor (GLP-1R) in pancreatic beta cells of the subject, or combinations thereof, relative to no administration of the one or more FXR agonists.
4. The method of any of claims 1-3, wherein the method improves glucose homeostasis in the subject.
5. The method of any of claims 1-4, further comprising detecting one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage in the subject.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein the one or more markers of pancreatic beta cell damage comprises thioredoxin-interacting protein (Txnip).
7. The method of any one of claims 1-6, wherein the one or more FXR agonists has the following structure:
Figure imgf000146_0001
wherein,
Figure imgf000147_0001
Ra is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, or polycyclic;
Rb is selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, or cycloalkyl; Y is CRg, N or N-0 (N- oxide);
Rc, Rd, Re and Rg are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide, alkyl, alkenyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, amino, sulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, aminocarbonyl, acyl, hydroxyl or nitro;
Rfa and Rft are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, halide or alkyl; La and Lb are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl, or together form a pi-bond;
Lc and Ld are each independently selected from hydrogen, deuterium, alkyl or cycloalkyl; W is selected from O or -(C(Lc)(Ld))s-;
s is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6;
n is 0 or 1 ; and
X is aryl, heterocyclic or heteroaryl.
8. The method of any of claims 1-7, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is deuterated.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is
Figure imgf000147_0002
10. The method of any of claims 19, wherein the subject has a body mass index (BMI) of 25 of higher, is hyperglycemic, produces no insulin or is insulin resistant, has a decreased number of pancreatic beta cells, has persistent islet cell antibodies, has high frequency of thyroid and gastric autoimmunity, has DR3 and DR4 human leukocyte antigen haplotypes, shows progressive loss of beta cells, has adult disease onset, has low levels of C-peptide, or combinations thereof.
11. The method of any of claims 1-10, wherein the subject is a mammal.
12. The method of claim 11, wherein the mammal is a human.
13. The method of any of claims 1-12, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is administered in combination with a therapeutically effective amount of one or more additional therapeutic compounds.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the one or more additional therapeutic compounds is an insulin-sensitizing drug, an insulin secretagogue, an alpha-glucosidase inhibitor, an amylin agonist, a dipeptidyl-peptidase 4 (DPP-4) inhibitor, a glucagon-like peptide (GLP) agonist, meglitinide, sulfonylurea, a peroxisome proliferator-activated receptor (PPAR)- gamma agonist, nicotinamide ribonucleoside, analogs of nicotinamide ribonucleoside, or combinations thereof.
15. The method of claim 14, wherein the PPAR- gamma agonist is a thiazolidinedione (TZD), aleglitazar, farglitazar, muraglitazar, or tesaglitazar.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein the TZD is pioglitazone, rosiglitazone, rivoglitazone, or troglitazone.
17. The method of any of claims 1-16, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is administered daily, twice daily, every other day, bi-weekly, weekly, or monthly.
18. The method of any of claims 1-17, wherein the one or more FXR agonists is administered at a dose of at least 1 mg/kg.
19. The method of any of claims 1-18, wherein the method further comprises: determining if the subject produces insulin;
determining a level of C-peptide in the subject;
determining a level of islet cell antibodies (ICA), glutamic acid decarboxylase autoantibodies (GADA), insulinoma-associated (IA-2) autoantibodies, and/or zinc transporter autoantibodies (ZnT8) in the subject; or
combinations thereof.
PCT/US2016/022082 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors WO2016149111A1 (en)

Priority Applications (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2016233579A AU2016233579A1 (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid X receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors
KR1020177027280A KR20170123658A (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treatment of Adult Latent Autoimmune Diabetes Using Phenesoid X Receptor Agonists to Activate Long Term Receptors
EP16765500.0A EP3267991A4 (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors
CA2979399A CA2979399A1 (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors
JP2017548103A JP2018510866A (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treatment of adult latent autoimmune diabetes with a farnesoid X receptor agonist to activate intestinal receptors
US15/697,271 US20180000768A1 (en) 2015-03-13 2017-09-06 Intestinal fxr agonism enhances glp-1 signaling to restore pancreatic beta cell functions

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201562133042P 2015-03-13 2015-03-13
US62/133,042 2015-03-13

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/697,271 Continuation US20180000768A1 (en) 2015-03-13 2017-09-06 Intestinal fxr agonism enhances glp-1 signaling to restore pancreatic beta cell functions

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016149111A1 true WO2016149111A1 (en) 2016-09-22

Family

ID=56919304

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2016/022082 WO2016149111A1 (en) 2015-03-13 2016-03-11 Treating latent autoimmune diabetes of adults with farnesoid x receptor agonists to activate intestinal receptors

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US20180000768A1 (en)
EP (1) EP3267991A4 (en)
JP (1) JP2018510866A (en)
KR (1) KR20170123658A (en)
AU (1) AU2016233579A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2979399A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2016149111A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018170166A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2018170182A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10377717B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2019-08-13 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10626081B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2020-04-21 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10703712B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2020-07-07 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2021009332A1 (en) 2019-07-18 2021-01-21 Enyo Pharma Method for decreasing adverse-effects of interferon
WO2021144330A1 (en) 2020-01-15 2021-07-22 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Use of fxr agonists for treating an infection by hepatitis d virus
US11084817B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2021-08-10 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2022152770A1 (en) 2021-01-14 2022-07-21 Enyo Pharma Synergistic effect of a fxr agonist and ifn for the treatment of hbv infection
WO2022229302A1 (en) 2021-04-28 2022-11-03 Enyo Pharma Strong potentiation of tlr3 agonists effects using fxr agonists as a combined treatment

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10301268B2 (en) 2014-03-13 2019-05-28 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using
AU2021240001A1 (en) * 2020-03-18 2022-10-13 Organovo, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists for the treatment of disease
KR20220026907A (en) 2020-08-26 2022-03-07 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and Method for Producing 3D Contents

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008051942A2 (en) * 2006-10-24 2008-05-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Farnesoid x receptor agonists
WO2008073825A1 (en) * 2006-12-08 2008-06-19 Exelixis, Inc. Lxr and fxr modulators
WO2014184271A1 (en) * 2013-05-14 2014-11-20 Tes Pharma Srl. 11-hydroxyl-derivatives of bile acids and amino acid conjugates thereof as farnesoid x receptor modulators
WO2015138969A1 (en) * 2014-03-13 2015-09-17 Salk Institute For Biological Studies Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050143449A1 (en) * 2002-11-15 2005-06-30 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Non-steroidal farnesoid X receptor modulators and methods for the use thereof
PT1734970E (en) * 2004-03-12 2015-03-11 Intercept Pharmaceuticals Inc Treatment of fibrosis using fxr ligands
US20080207594A1 (en) * 2005-05-04 2008-08-28 Davelogen Aktiengesellschaft Use of Gsk-3 Inhibitors for Preventing and Treating Pancreatic Autoimmune Disorders

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008051942A2 (en) * 2006-10-24 2008-05-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Farnesoid x receptor agonists
WO2008073825A1 (en) * 2006-12-08 2008-06-19 Exelixis, Inc. Lxr and fxr modulators
WO2014184271A1 (en) * 2013-05-14 2014-11-20 Tes Pharma Srl. 11-hydroxyl-derivatives of bile acids and amino acid conjugates thereof as farnesoid x receptor modulators
WO2015138969A1 (en) * 2014-03-13 2015-09-17 Salk Institute For Biological Studies Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HAWA, M.I. ET AL.: "Adult-onset autoimmune diabetes in Europe is prevalent with a broad clinical phenotype: Action LADA 7", DIABETES CARE., vol. 36, no. 4, April 2013 (2013-04-01), pages 908 - 913, XP055311794 *
MUDALIAR, S. ET AL.: "Farnesoid-X receptor agonists - A new therapeutic class for diabetes and NAFLD - First clinical data", DIABETOLOGIA, vol. 52, no. S1, 2009, pages S78, XP055482751 *
See also references of EP3267991A4 *

Cited By (25)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10626081B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2020-04-21 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US11214538B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2022-01-04 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10377717B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2019-08-13 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10703712B2 (en) 2015-09-16 2020-07-07 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10961198B2 (en) 2017-03-15 2021-03-30 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
CN110637011B (en) * 2017-03-15 2024-05-14 奥加诺沃公司 Fanisole X receptor agonist and application thereof
JP2020514333A (en) * 2017-03-15 2020-05-21 メタクリン,インク. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
CN110637011A (en) * 2017-03-15 2019-12-31 梅塔科林公司 Farnesoin X receptor agonists and uses thereof
EP3609888A4 (en) * 2017-03-15 2020-09-02 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
EP3596053A4 (en) * 2017-03-15 2020-09-02 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
CN110637015A (en) * 2017-03-15 2019-12-31 梅塔科林公司 Farnesoin X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US10927082B2 (en) 2017-03-15 2021-02-23 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2018170166A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
JP7174709B2 (en) 2017-03-15 2022-11-17 メタクリン,インク. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
IL269068B (en) * 2017-03-15 2022-09-01 Metacrine Inc Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2018170182A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
US11236071B1 (en) 2017-03-15 2022-02-01 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
CN110637015B (en) * 2017-03-15 2024-04-02 奥加诺沃公司 Fanisole X receptor agonist and application thereof
IL269065B (en) * 2017-03-15 2022-09-01 Metacrine Inc Farnesoid x receptor agonists and uses thereof
US11084817B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2021-08-10 Metacrine, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
US11773094B2 (en) 2018-09-18 2023-10-03 Organovo, Inc. Farnesoid X receptor agonists and uses thereof
WO2021009332A1 (en) 2019-07-18 2021-01-21 Enyo Pharma Method for decreasing adverse-effects of interferon
WO2021144330A1 (en) 2020-01-15 2021-07-22 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Use of fxr agonists for treating an infection by hepatitis d virus
WO2022152770A1 (en) 2021-01-14 2022-07-21 Enyo Pharma Synergistic effect of a fxr agonist and ifn for the treatment of hbv infection
WO2022229302A1 (en) 2021-04-28 2022-11-03 Enyo Pharma Strong potentiation of tlr3 agonists effects using fxr agonists as a combined treatment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2979399A1 (en) 2016-09-22
JP2018510866A (en) 2018-04-19
AU2016233579A1 (en) 2017-10-12
EP3267991A1 (en) 2018-01-17
EP3267991A4 (en) 2018-12-12
US20180000768A1 (en) 2018-01-04
KR20170123658A (en) 2017-11-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20180000768A1 (en) Intestinal fxr agonism enhances glp-1 signaling to restore pancreatic beta cell functions
EP3116851B1 (en) Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using
US11440889B2 (en) Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using
US10077268B2 (en) FXR agonists and methods for making and using
RU2328283C2 (en) Treatment of diabetes type 2 with inhibitors of dipeptidylpaptidase iv
JP2017510572A (en) FXR agonists and methods for making and using
Scott Linagliptin: in type 2 diabetes mellitus
WO2017078928A1 (en) Fxr agonists and methods for making and using
Shah et al. GPR119 agonists for the potential treatment of type 2 diabetes and related metabolic disorders
AU2002244860A1 (en) Treatment of type 2 diabetes with inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV
US20130216625A1 (en) Treatment of insulin resistance or diseases associated with insulin resistance
TW201136916A (en) New uses
WO2006132196A1 (en) NOVEL PHARMACEUTICAL COMPRISING β3 AGONIST
US9050347B2 (en) 1,2,4-oxadiazole derivatives as drugs modulating the GLP-1 peptide receptor
WO2017078927A1 (en) Analogs of fexaramine and methods of making and using

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16765500

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2979399

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017548103

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2016765500

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20177027280

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016233579

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20160311

Kind code of ref document: A